Casio Qt6600 Reference Manual User Ece449c9 5cfd 43d1 89db 9344cd5d0bd8

User Manual: casio qt6600 Casio Car Video System QT-6600 User Guide |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 240 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

QT-6600

Touch Screen Smart Terminal

———————————————————————

Reference Manual

Version 1.0 November 2008

R-2

Preface

This manual is intended to be used as a reference to the QT-6600 system. It provides details

to allow whole understanding of the system capabilities, its operation, and how it can be used

to solve many problems within the retail outlet. This manual does not describe actual

programming, which is covered in the QT-6600 programming manual.

This manual consists of the following chapters:

1. Introduction

This chapter describes the concepts of development of the QT-6600 system.

2. Hardware configuration

This chapter outlines the hardware, optional devices and configurations of QT-6600

system.

3. Application systems

This chapter outlines the application system and overviews the function provided for the

QT-6600 system.

4. Manager operation

This chapter explains the manager operations to use QT-6600 system.

5. Registrations

This chapter explains actual registration operations with example.

6. Refund mode operation

This chapter explains registrations in the RF or REG– mode.

7. Read and reset

This chapter explains detail of the read and reset operations and reports.

8. Appendices

These chapters show the record format and descriptions of individual files, total

calculation method, meaning of error messages, etc.

• System down and recovery (in the Installation and Down Recovery manual)

This chapter explains actions to take and recovery methods when the system goes down.

Note: Casio reserves the right to change equipment and specifications without obligation

and notification. The terms used in this manual may be different from those used in

other manuals of Casio’s product.

Printing history

Manual version Software version

Version 1.0 : November, 2008 First Edition: November, 2008 Version 1.0

Revised points

R-3

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Introduction

The QT-6600 is a versatile intelligent terminal developed in accordance with the following concepts.

1) System concept

Developing a high performance economical system by adopting the restaurant, bar, fast

food system.

– Shared check tracking

The QT-6600 system has the capability of check tracking system.

– Shared printer system

All terminals in the cluster can share remote printer(s).

– Collection, consolidation, and auto-program functions

The QT-6600 system is equipped with these functions by utilizing high-speed in-line data

transfer system.

– Versatile terminal

With the QT-6600 system, any terminal has the same function, and can be designated as

the master terminal by programming.

2) Software concept

A flexible application system for development, adopting the following methods:

– Function classified application system

3) Terminal hardware concept

Color LCD with touch panel

In addition to the above, the QT-6600 is also a terminal following characteristics:

– Expandability

The QT-6600 system can be connected to various peripheral devices (slip printer, modem,

a personal computer, etc.)

– Reliability

The QT-6600 is provided with a self-diagnosis program so that the terminal can check the

hardware. When a malfunction occurs during processing, an error report is logged into the

system memory so that the error can quickly be corrected.

Contents

R-4

To prevent malfunctions caused by the weak batteries, charge the memory

protection batteries for over 12-hours before installation or after a longtime vacation

(over 30 days).

• Before installation, initialize the terminal and leave it power on over 12-hours.

• After a longtime vacation, initialize the terminal and restore the program data if the

terminal is in malfunction, and leave it power on over 12-hours.

• QT-6600 consumes batteries for saving data during 2 minutes after turning off the

terminal.

• Do NOT power off the terminal over 10 times while a short term. (Except INIT or FC

operation) Otherwise, it makes weak batteries.

R-5

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1. Hardware configuration ..................................................................... R-10

1-1. General configuration ............................................................................................ R-10

1-2. Hardware diagram ................................................................................................. R-11

1-3. Keyboard ............................................................................................................... R-12

1-4. Display................................................................................................................... R-13

1-5. Cash drawer .......................................................................................................... R-14

1-6. Input/output connectors......................................................................................... R-15

1-7. Optional peripherals .............................................................................................. R-16

1-8. System configuration............................................................................................. R-17

2. Application systems........................................................................... R-23

2-1. General description of application system ...................................... R-23

2-1-1. File concept ........................................................................................................... R-23

2-1-2. Linkage of totalizers .............................................................................................. R-24

2-1-3. Function keys ........................................................................................................ R-25

2-1-4. Keyboard layout..................................................................................................... R-25

2-1-5. Mode control ......................................................................................................... R-26

2-1-6. Operation prompt and error messages ................................................................. R-26

2-1-7. Printing control system .......................................................................................... R-26

2-2. General description of individual function keys ............................. R-29

2-2-1. System keys .......................................................................................................... R-29

2-2-2. Finalize keys.......................................................................................................... R-30

2-2-3. Transaction keys .................................................................................................... R-30

2-3. Remote printer control ....................................................................... R-39

2-3-1. Remote printer system configuration .................................................................... R-39

2-3-2. Remote printer control setting ............................................................................... R-40

2-3-3. Remote printer output control................................................................................ R-41

2-3-4. Remote printer backup processes ........................................................................ R-41

2-4. Check tracking system....................................................................... R-44

2-4-1. Shared check tracking system .............................................................................. R-44

2-4-2. Shared check tracking requirement....................................................................... R-45

2-4-3. Data backup when the master goes down ............................................................ R-45

2-5. Other check tracking system control ............................................... R-46

2-5-1. The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization ............................ R-46

2-5-2. Table transfer......................................................................................................... R-46

2-5-3. Store and recall ..................................................................................................... R-46

2-6. Clerk control function ........................................................................ R-48

2-6-1. Clerk interrupt ....................................................................................................... R-48

2-6-2. Clerk detail memory .............................................................................................. R-49

2-6-3. Clerk training ......................................................................................................... R-49

2-6-4. Manager mode control .......................................................................................... R-49

2-7. Arrangement key function and scheduler ........................................ R-51

Contents

R-6

2-7-1. Arrangement key function ..................................................................................... R-51

2-7-2. Arrangement program example............................................................................. R-55

2-7-3. Scheduled execution of arrangement function ...................................................... R-55

2-8. Making graphic logo........................................................................... R-56

2-8-1. About graphic logo ................................................................................................ R-56

2-8-2. Making graphic logo procedure ............................................................................. R-56

2-9. Hourly item .......................................................................................... R-57

2-9-1. Programming necessary files before using hourly item function. .......................... R-57

2-10. Time and attendance .......................................................................... R-58

2-10-1. Corresponding relations of the file ........................................................................ R-59

2-10-2. Clock-in operation ................................................................................................. R-62

2-10-3. Clock-out operation ............................................................................................... R-65

2-11. Sign on control ................................................................................... R-68

2-11-1. Sign on ..................................................................................................................R-68

2-11-2. Solution to abnormality of master terminal............................................................ R-69

2-11-3. Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal .......................................................... R-69

2-11-4. Sign on compulsory .............................................................................................. R-69

2-12. IDC (Item Data Capture) ..................................................................... R-70

2-12-1. Available capturing items ...................................................................................... R-70

2-12-2. Set up the IDC start / end ..................................................................................... R-73

2-12-3. How to memorize the captured items.................................................................... R-74

2-12-4. IDC data file structure ........................................................................................... R-75

2-12-5. IDC data type ........................................................................................................ R-81

2-12-6. Transferring IDC .................................................................................................... R-82

2-13. Electronic journal ............................................................................... R-83

2-13-1. Storing electronic journal ...................................................................................... R-83

2-13-2. Issuing electronic journal report ............................................................................ R-83

2-13-3. Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after sales..... R-83

2-13-4. Transferring electronic journal memory ................................................................. R-84

2-14. Simple time and attendance .............................................................. R-85

2-14-1. Clock-in operation ................................................................................................. R-85

2-14-2. Clock-out operation ............................................................................................... R-86

2-14-3. Worktime display ................................................................................................... R-86

2-14-4. Report ...................................................................................................................R-86

2-15. Magnetic card reading ....................................................................... R-87

3. Manager operation ............................................................................. R-88

3-1. Machine initialization ......................................................................... R-88

3-1-1. INIT ....................................................................................................................... R-88

3-1-2. Flag clear .............................................................................................................. R-88

R-7

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-1-3. INIT 2 .................................................................................................................... R-89

3-1-4. INIT code............................................................................................................... R-89

3-2. IPL (Initial Program Loading) ............................................................ R-89

3-2-1. IPL ......................................................................................................................... R-89

3-2-2. System configuration before IPL operation ........................................................... R-90

3-3. Manager function................................................................................ R-91

3-3-1. System connection check ..................................................................................... R-92

3-3-2. Remote on............................................................................................................. R-93

3-3-3. Remote off............................................................................................................. R-93

3-3-4. Busy reset ............................................................................................................. R-94

3-3-5. Stock maintenance ................................................................................................ R-95

3-3-6. Drawer for clerk ..................................................................................................... R-96

3-3-7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt)........................................................................................... R-96

3-3-8. Order ID change.................................................................................................... R-97

3-3-9. Error log print ........................................................................................................ R-98

3-3-10. System re-configuration ........................................................................................ R-99

3-3-11. Item Data Capture ............................................................................................... R-100

3-3-12. Euro change over ................................................................................................ R-101

3-3-13. Clerk window ....................................................................................................... R-102

3-3-14. Customer............................................................................................................. R-103

3-3-15. Customer busy reset ........................................................................................... R-104

3-3-16. Sound .................................................................................................................. R-104

3-3-17. Print batch maintenance file ................................................................................ R-105

3-3-18. Execute batch maintenance file .......................................................................... R-106

3-3-19. Re-index the scanning PLU file ........................................................................... R-107

3-3-21. FTP client ............................................................................................................ R-108

3-3-20. Licence code entry .............................................................................................. R-108

3-3-22. Maintenance data................................................................................................ R-109

3-3-23. Printer logo send ................................................................................................. R-110

3-3-24. Clerk number ....................................................................................................... R-111

3-3-25. Operation monitor ............................................................................................... R-111

3-4. System command execution ........................................................... R-112

3-4-1. X/Z reporting ....................................................................................................... R-112

3-4-2. X/Z collection / consolidation............................................................................... R-114

3-4-3. Remote power control ......................................................................................... R-114

3-5. Data communication system ........................................................... R-115

3-5-1. Inline / online connectors .................................................................................... R-115

3-5-2. Hardware interface .............................................................................................. R-116

3-5-3. Inline / online functions........................................................................................ R-118

3-6. Collection / Consolidation system .................................................. R-119

3-6-1. X/Z collection....................................................................................................... R-121

3-6-2. X/Z consolidation................................................................................................. R-123

3-6-3. X/Z collection / consolidation............................................................................... R-126

3-7. Auto-programming function ............................................................ R-129

Contents

R-8

3-7-1. Auto-programming functions ............................................................................... R-129

3-7-2. Auto-program operation and CF card utilities ...................................................... R-130

4. Registrations..................................................................................... R-136

4-1. Clerk sign on / off operation ................................................................................ R-136

4-2. Voiding the last registered item (<VOID> key operation) .................................... R-137

4-3. Voiding the previous registered item (<VOID> key operation)............................. R-138

4-4. Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction ...................................... R-138

4-5. Using the list function .......................................................................................... R-140

4-6. Using the set menu function and pulldown group function .................................. R-141

4-7. Post entry ............................................................................................................ R-144

4-8. Separate check ................................................................................................... R-145

4-9. Open check ......................................................................................................... R-146

4-9. Split payment (Dutch account) ............................................................................ R-146

4-10. Media change...................................................................................................... R-147

4-11. Eat-in / Takeout ................................................................................................... R-148

4-12. Scanning PLU ..................................................................................................... R-148

4-13. Shift PLU ............................................................................................................. R-151

4-14. Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)............................................ R-151

4-15. Round repeat function ......................................................................................... R-152

4-16. Mix & match / coupon.......................................................................................... R-153

4-17. Customer............................................................................................................. R-154

4-18. Table sharing ....................................................................................................... R-155

4-19. Order character change ...................................................................................... R-155

4-20. Item search ......................................................................................................... R-155

4-21. Scan Mix & match ............................................................................................... R-156

4-22. Time calculation .................................................................................................. R-157

4-23. Additional PLU character .................................................................................... R-158

5. Refund mode operation ................................................................... R-160

5-1. Selecting REF or REG– mode ............................................................................ R-160

6. Read and reset operations .............................................................. R-162

6-1. The procedures of reading or resetting ............................................................... R-162

6-2. Report sample ..................................................................................................... R-164

A-1. Function key list ................................................................................... R-180

A-2. File format ............................................................................................. R-185

A-3. Counter and Totalizer calculation method ......................................... R-222

A-4. Error messages .................................................................................... R-226

Index ...............................................................................................................R-233

R-9

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1. Hardware configuration ......................................................................... R-10

1-1. General configuration.................................................................................... R-10

1-2. Hardware diagram ........................................................................................ R-11

1-3. Keyboard ....................................................................................................... R-12

1-4. Display .......................................................................................................... R-13

1-5. Cash drawer .................................................................................................. R-14

1-6. Input/output connectors ................................................................................ R-15

1-7. Optional peripherals ...................................................................................... R-16

1-8. System configuration .................................................................................... R-17

R-10

Hardware Configuration

1. Hardware configuration

This section outlines the hardware, optional devices, and configurations of the QT-6600

system.

1-1. General configuration

Touch screen panel

Display on/off key

Pilot lamp

i-Button key receiver

(only for QT-6600-DLS)

Microphone

Stand

Customer display

Power switch cover

Panel fixing screw

Connector cover

Front view

Rear view

R-11

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Scanner

Drawer

Remote

display

QT-6060D

Slip

printer

SP-1300

MODEM

CPU

RAMFlash

Memory

32MB 64MB

NOR

FROM

64MB

Note: Shadowed device and dot line indicate option devices.

QT-6061CB or QT-6062CB

PRT-CB-8A/-8B

PRT-CB-8C

PRL-CB-2

CAT5 UTP cable

Remote

printer

UP-400

Remote

printer

UP-400

Power

supply

PRT-CB-8A/-8B

Power

supply

PRT-CB-8A/-8B

Power

supply

Remote

printer

UP-360

Microphone

Speaker

i-Button

key i/f

CF card

Power switch cover

1024 x 768 dot color LCD

Max. 126 key touch screen

HUB

Other terminals

PC or LAN printer

MCR

QT-6046MCR

AC Adptor

Drawer 2 i/f

Drawer 1 i/f

Inline

RS-232C COM1

RS-232C COM2

RS-232C COM3

RS-232C COM4

RS-232C COM5

RS-232C COM6

Ext. microphone

Ext. speaker

QT-6011DLS

(except for

QT-6600-DLS)

Remote

printer

UP-400

Power

supply

1-2. Hardware diagram

R-12

Hardware Configuration

1-3-2. Hard key code of keyboard

1-3. Keyboard

1-3-1. Standard keyboard

PLU010 PLU020 PLU030 PLU040 PLU050 PLU060 PLU070

PLU009 PLU019 PLU029 PLU039 PLU049 PLU059 PLU069

PLU008 PLU018 PLU028 PLU038 PLU048 PLU058 PLU068

PLU007 PLU017 PLU027 PLU037 PLU047 PLU057 PLU067

PLU006 PLU016 PLU026 PLU036 PLU046 PLU056 PLU066

PLU005 PLU015 PLU025 PLU035 PLU045 PLU055 PLU065

PLU004 PLU014 PLU024 PLU034 PLU044 PLU054 PLU064

PLU003 PLU013 PLU023 PLU033 PLU043 PLU053 PLU063

PLU002 PLU012 PLU022 PLU032 PLU042 PLU052 PLU062

PLU001 PLU011 PLU021 PLU031 PLU041 PLU051 PLU061

LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST

1234567

MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU

1234567

MODE

CLEAR X VOID

789

456

123

000•

CLK#

RECEIPT

PLU#

REPORTS

ESC/

SKIP

PAGE

DOWN

POST

ENTRY

FUNC

LIST

FIN.

LIST

CASH/AMT

/TEND

SEP

CHK

NEW/OLD

CHK

TBL

TRANS

TABLE

RECEIPT

PAGE

HOME

END

YES NO

#/NS COVERS MENU

SEAT#

SUBTOTAL NB

REG

01 31-10-08 12:34 PM 001234

•0.00

12345678901234567890

048 060 072 084 096 108 120 132

047 059 071 083 095 107 119 131

046 058 070 082 094 106 118 130

045 057 069 081 093 105 117 129

044 056 068 080 092 104 116 128

043 055 067 079 091 103 115 127

042 054 066 078 090 102 114 126

041 053 065 077 089 101 113 125

040 052 064 076 088 100 112 124

039 051 063 075 087 099 111 123

038 050 062 074 086 098 110 122

037 049 061 073 085 097 109 121

006 012 018 024 030 036

005 011 017 023 029 035

004 010 016 022 028 034

003 009 015 021 027 033

002 008 014 020 026 032

001 007 013 019 025 031

789

456

123

000•

REG

01 31-10-08 12:34 PM 001234

•0.00

12345678901234567890

•In case of assigning a double or quadruple key, the key code of the key is shadowed part

of the key.

R-13

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1-4. Display

1-4-1. Main display part

1Main display part: Used for displaying numeric entries, registration, subtotal amount, etc.

Menu level display part: Used for displaying the current shift PLU, menu sheet and 2nd unit price level.

3Keyboard part: Mainly used for keyboard (sometimes it is used for pop-up window)

REG

01 01-01-01 12:34 001234

1 Spagetti •20.00 T1↑

1 Spagetti •20.00 T1

7.5%

%- -1.75 T1

1 Coffee •8.00

1 Hamburger •2.00 T1

15%

%- -0.30 T1

1 Milk •2.00

2 Apple Juice •5.00

1 Coffee •8.00 ↓

Spagetti •20.00

§ ©ª 12 •76.50

Status Icons

• Communication: §• Receipt on: ©

• Master/BM error: ¶• Character shift:

• Cut off Master or BM: ßDouble size: ª

Standard size: π

Items sold Total amount

Current transaction amount/change

Scroll area

Mode Clerk Date Time Consecutive number

PLU010 PLU020 PLU030 PLU040 PLU050 PLU060 PLU070

PLU009 PLU019 PLU029 PLU039 PLU049 PLU059 PLU069

PLU008 PLU018 PLU028 PLU038 PLU048 PLU058 PLU068

PLU007 PLU017 PLU027 PLU037 PLU047 PLU057 PLU067

PLU006 PLU016 PLU026 PLU036 PLU046 PLU056 PLU066

PLU005 PLU015 PLU025 PLU035 PLU045 PLU055 PLU065

PLU004 PLU014 PLU024 PLU034 PLU044 PLU054 PLU064

PLU003 PLU013 PLU023 PLU033 PLU043 PLU053 PLU063

PLU002 PLU012 PLU022 PLU032 PLU042 PLU052 PLU062

PLU001 PLU011 PLU021 PLU031 PLU041 PLU051 PLU061

LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST

1234567

MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU

1234567

MODE SEARCH

CLEAR X VOID

789

456

123

000•

CLK#

RECEIPT

PLU#

REPORTS

ESC/

SKIP

PAGE

DOWN

POST

ENTRY

FUNC

LIST

FIN.

LIST

CASH/AMT

/TEND

SEP

CHK

NEW/OLD

CHK

TBL

TRANS

TABLE

RECEIPT

PAGE

HOME

END

YES NO

#/NS COVERS MENU

SEAT#

SUBTOTAL NB

REG

01 31-10-08 12:34 PM 001234

•0.00

1-4-2. Main display part contents

R-14

Hardware Configuration

1-5. Cash drawer

In case of connecting drawer, follow the procedure below.

Connect the drawer.

1. Connect drawer connector (three color lead on drawer) to the terminal.

2. Connect frame drawer connector (green lead on drawer) to the terminal.

Mount the cash register.

1. Screw in 2 fixing screws bottom side of the terminal.

2. Mount the terminal on the top of the drawer, ensuring that the feet on the bottom of the

terminal go into the holes on the drawer.

DISPLAY

SCANNER

PC/MODEM

COM3

COM6

COM2

COM5

COM1

COM4

LAN

1-4-4. Main display brightness control

1-4-3. Menu level display part contents

SHIFT PLU 1 Menu shift 1 2nd@

Shift PLU level (1 ~ 8) Menu shift (1 ~ 15) 2nd unit Price level (1 ~ 2)

Brightness control

R-15

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1-6. Input/output connectors

Power switch

Main power switch is located in the power switch cover.

Input /output connectors

Inline connector, COM port, and drawer cable are located in the backside connector cover.

DISPLAY

SCANNER

PC/MODEM

COM3

COM6

COM2

COM5

COM1

COM4

SPK

PS/2

KEYBOARD

MIC

LAN

Brightness COM3 COM6 COM2 COM5 COM1 COM4

Inline (10/100Base-T)

PS/2 Keyboard

AC Adaptor

Drawer 2

Drawer 1

Ext. microphone

Ext. speaker

Bottom side of the terminal

Power switch

R-16

Hardware Configuration

1-7. Optional peripherals

The following optional peripherals can be used by plugging them into the appropriate port.

1) Personal computer / MODEM: RS-232C COM 1 port

2) Scanner: RS-232C COM 2 port

Hand-held scanner, Fixed scanner

3) Slip printer: RS-232C COM 2 port

SP-1300

In case of installing both scanner and slip printer, connect slip to COM 4, 5 port.

If you connect the slip printer to COM 4 , the automatic detection during INIT does not

performed. You muse program the I/O parameter manually.

4) Remote display: RS-232C COM 3 port

QT-6060D

5) Remote printer (UP-400/360): RS-232C COM 4 ~ 6 port

The remote printer is used for reports/kitchen orders/receipts.

6) Inline: Inline port

You can use CAT5 UTP cable.

7 Drawer: drawer port

8) CF card: CF card slot (in the card slot cover)

9) PS-2 keyboard (Microsoft Wired Keyboard RT2300): PS-2 keyboard port

R-17

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1-8. System configuration

This section represents the system configuration of the QT-6600. The QT-6600 have four

different system configurations, such as 1. Shared check tracking/ floating clerk interrupt

system, 2. Inline collection/ consolidation system, 3. Online collection/ consolidation

system, and 4. Online collection/ consolidation system (use FTP feature).

Before detail explanation, we should define the words:

1) Check master:

Check master is the master server of shared check tracking system and floating clerk

interrupt system. This terminal has check index and detail files and controls them.

2) Check backup master:

Check backup master is the backup server of shared check tracking system and floating

clerk interrupt system. This terminal also has check index and detail files and update

them at the same timing of master.

When the check master goes down, the backup master plays the role of check master.

3) Check self master:

Check self master has its check tracking system files and clerk interrupt files for itself.

4) Satellite:

The terminal which is not assigned to 1) ~ 3) above.

5) Remote printer (via RS-232C or LAN):

Remote printer prints data sent from both its own terminal and other terminal of the

system.

6) Local printer:

Local printer prints data sent from its own terminal.

1-9-1. Shared check tracking system/floating clerk interrupt system

System Recommendation

OrderOrder

Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

CHK/M

CHK/BM

PRN (1) PRN (2)

LAN Printer RS-232C Printer

Order OrderOrder

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

Up to 16 remote printers

Slip

inline

R-18

Hardware Configuration

Available peripherals versus ECR definition

✓: Available

Available combinations ECR definition

✓: Available

Note:

1) Please follow the system recommendation above. Otherwise the system performance

may be slow down.

Peripherals

ECR definition Remote Slip PC/

printer printer

MODEM

Check master ✔✔✔

Check backup master ✔✔✔

Self master ✔✔✔

Satellite ✔✔✔

Check Check Self Terminal

ECR definition master backup master w/ remote

master printer

Check master ××✔

Check backup master ××✔

Self master ×× ✔

Terminal w/ remote printer ✔✔✔

R-19

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Via COM 1 port of the master terminal

or Inline (wire or wireless)

Maximum 32 terminals

1-8-2. Inline collection/consolidation system

•Inline collection/consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

1-8-3. Online collection / consolidation system

•Online collection / consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

on-line (Public / Private Telephone line)

Maximum 32 terminals

R-20

Hardware Configuration

Maximum 32 terminals

ADSL/FTTH

MODEM

ADSL/FTTH

MODEM

VPN rooter

VPN rooter Internet

1-8-4. Online collection / consolidation system (use FTP feature)

•Online collection / consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

R-21

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Application systems ............................................................................ R-23

2-1. General description of application system ....................................... R-23

2-1-1. File concept................................................................................................... R-23

2-1-2. Linkage of totalizers ...................................................................................... R-24

2-1-3. Function keys ................................................................................................ R-25

2-1-4. Keyboard layout ............................................................................................ R-25

2-1-5. Mode control ................................................................................................. R-26

2-1-6. Operation prompt and error messages ......................................................... R-26

2-1-7. Printing control system.................................................................................. R-26

2-2. General description of individual function keys............................... R-29

2-2-1. System keys .................................................................................................. R-29

2-2-2. Finalize keys ................................................................................................. R-30

2-2-3. Transaction keys ........................................................................................... R-30

2-3. Remote printer control ........................................................................ R-39

2-3-1. Remote printer system configuration ............................................................ R-39

2-3-2. Remote printer control setting ....................................................................... R-40

2-3-3. Remote printer output control ....................................................................... R-41

2-3-4. Remote printer backup processes ................................................................ R-41

2-4. Check tracking system........................................................................ R-44

2-4-1. Shared check tracking system ...................................................................... R-44

2-4-2. Shared check tracking requirement .............................................................. R-45

2-4-3. Data backup when the master goes down .................................................... R-45

2-5. Other check tracking system control ................................................. R-46

2-5-1. The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization .................... R-46

2-5-2. Table transfer ................................................................................................ R-46

2-5-3. Store and recall ............................................................................................. R-46

2-6. Clerk control function ......................................................................... R-48

2-6-1. Clerk interrupt ............................................................................................... R-48

2-6-2. Clerk detail memory ...................................................................................... R-49

2-6-3. Clerk training ................................................................................................. R-49

2-6-4. Manager mode control .................................................................................. R-49

2-7. Arrangement key function and scheduler ......................................... R-51

2-7-1. Arrangement key function ............................................................................. R-51

2-7-2. Arrangement program example .................................................................... R-55

2-7-3. Scheduled execution of arrangement function .............................................. R-55

2-8. Making graphic logo ............................................................................ R-56

2-8-1. About graphic logo ........................................................................................ R-56

2-8-2. Making graphic logo procedure..................................................................... R-56

2-9. Hourly item ........................................................................................... R-57

2-9-1. Programming necessary files before using hourly item function................... R-57

2-10. Time and attendance ........................................................................... R-58

2-10-1. Corresponding relations of the file ................................................................ R-59

2-10-2. Clock-in operation ......................................................................................... R-62

2-10-3. Clock-out operation ....................................................................................... R-65

R-22

Application System

2-11. Sign on control .................................................................................... R-68

2-11-1. Sign on .......................................................................................................... R-68

2-11-2. Solution to abnormality of master terminal ................................................... R-69

2-11-3. Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal .................................................. R-69

2-11-4. Sign on compulsory ...................................................................................... R-69

2-12. IDC (Item Data Capture) ...................................................................... R-70

2-12-1. Available capturing items .............................................................................. R-70

2-12-2. Set up the IDC start / end ............................................................................. R-73

2-12-3. How to memorize the captured items ........................................................... R-74

2-12-4. IDC data file structure ................................................................................... R-75

2-12-5. IDC data type ................................................................................................ R-81

2-12-6. Transferring IDC ............................................................................................ R-82

2-13. Electronic journal ................................................................................ R-83

2-13-1. Storing electronic journal .............................................................................. R-83

2-13-2. Issuing electronic journal report .................................................................... R-83

2-13-3. Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after salesR-83

2-13-4. Transferring electronic journal memory ......................................................... R-84

2-14. Simple time and attendance ............................................................... R-85

2-14-1. Clock-in operation ......................................................................................... R-85

2-14-2. Clock-out operation ....................................................................................... R-86

2-14-3. Worktime display ........................................................................................... R-86

2-14-4. Report ........................................................................................................... R-86

2-15. Magnetic card reading......................................................................... R-87

R-23

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Application systems

This section describes the configuration of application system and their related setting with

the QT-6600. Reading this section provides a general understanding of the overall system

of the terminal.

2-1. General description of application system

2-1-1. File concept

Programming data for each function, as well as registration data, are assigned and handled

in the RAM of the terminal in data blocks called files. Each files identified by a 3-digit file

number consists of multiple records.

Memory management on a file basis allows flexibility memory allocation in accordance

with the application of a specific terminal. The number of records per file can be

programmed, and a file can even be programmed for zero records.

There are three types of files:

–Terminal files:

Terminal files include system work files, daily total files, periodic total 1, periodic total

2 files, buffer files, and program files. Periodic total files have only totalizer field, and

totalize the same data which is accumulated to terminal files at the same time. The

periodic total 1 files have 100 order file numbers, and the periodic total 2 files have 200

order file numbers.

These files can be reset individually and separately from the terminal files. This

provides access to weekly and monthly total data. The periodic total 1 files and 2 files

have the same functions, and can accumulate data with different periods. The same

number of records as the corresponding terminal file must be reserved for each periodic

total files.

–Consolidation files:

Consolidation files are work files for consolidation of daily total, periodic 1 total and

periodic 2 total data from each terminal, and have 300, 400 and 500 order file numbers,

respectively. The same number of records as the corresponding terminal files must be

reserved for each file, on the master terminal.

–Consolidation work files:

Consolidation work files are work files for collection/consolidation of daily, periodic

1/2 data from each terminal. The files have 600 order file numbers.

The file number of records as the corresponding terminal file must be reserved for each

consolidation file.

Each file requires an internal work area, so calculation of actual file size can be performed

using the following formula:

Record length × Number of records + Work area = Actual file size

The table on the page 18 ~ 22 of the programming manual shows all the files available for

the terminal. See the Appendix A-2 of this manual for detail formats of individual files.

R-24

Application System

Calculation

Fixed totalizer

Scanning PLU file

PLU file Subdept. file Dept. file Group file Clerk detail file Other file

Function key

totalizer

Registration

*1 *1 *1

Registration data flow

*1 Linking between PLUs/ scanning PLUs, subdepartments, departments and groups can

be programmed to meet the needs of the retail environment.

PLUs/ scanning PLUs can be programmed to link with subdepartments, departments

or group, while subdepartment can be programmed to link with department or group,

and department can be programmed to link with group.

When a PLU is programmed to link with a department, data registered for the PLU is

also accumulated to the department. In addition, when the department is programmed

to link with a group, data registered for the PLU is simultaneously reflected the

department totalizer and group totalizer.

*2 When data is registered to a totalizer which is preset in the clerk detail link table, the

data is also accumulated to the clerk detail totalizer reserved for each relevant clerk.

2-1-2. Linkage of totalizers

Registered data is accumulated to totalizers which are reserved for each functions.

The QT-6600 has the following types of totalizers:

1) Fixed totalizers

Registration data is accumulated for individual terminals.

2) Function key totalizers

Data input by finalize or transaction keys is accumulated in totalizers for each key.

Operation types, as well as data used in operation differ depending on the key.

3) Subdepartment totalizers

Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each subdepartment.

4) Department totalizers

Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each department.

5) Group totalizers

Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each group.

6) PLU/ scanning PLU totalizers

Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each PLU/ scanning PLU.

7) Clerk totalizers

Registration data is accumulated for each relevant clerk. A clerk detail totalizer can be

linked to a fix totalizer, finalize key, transaction key, or item totalizer (department /

PLU / subdepartment / group), and accumulate data registered for the destination

totalizer of each relevant clerk.

8) Other totalizer

Functions for hourly sales, monthly sales void reason, table analysis, time attendance

and hourly item etc. also have totalizers.

R-25

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-1-3. Function keys

The keys on the keyboard can be assigned various functions that are used for registration

as required for the terminal. For convenience sake, these functions are called by function

keys.

There are two types of function keys:

1) System keys

Numeric keys, clear key, home position key, end key, left / right / up / down arrow keys,

yes key, no key, mode selection keys, ESC/SKIP key, page up / down key are system

keys.

2) Function keys

These function keys are used for finalize a transaction, to specify the functions for a

registration or to specify the meaning of a entry. These function keys have program-

mable functions, which are set to the transaction key / department / subdepartment /

PLU file.

Function keys include finalize key, transaction key, department key, subdepartment

key and flat PLU key.

The list of all function keys is shown in the Program 4 chapter of the programming manual.

General descriptions of individual function keys are found in the chapter 2-2.

2-1-4. Keyboard layout

Normally, the keyboard is assigned functions which are required for registration of

transactions. The keyboard is also used for character input when entering descriptors or

names during programming.

The QT-6600 automatically switches the keyboard to its character input function when it

determines that character input is required for the operation sequence you are performing.

This means that you can input characters without having to worry about manually changing

the keyboard input mode.

The function key (except system keys) allocation is fully programmable to meet the

specific needs of each terminal. The actual programming of key layouts can be performed

in the PGM4 mode, and programmed data is written onto the key table (file 074/174).

The allocation can also be programmed when programming each function file for

programming function keys such as finalize keys, transaction keys, department keys,

subdepartment keys, and flat PLU keys.

Standard function key layout

Refer to the page 16 of the user’s manual.

Character key layout

Refer to the page 126, 127 of the programming manual.

R-26

Application System

2-1-5. Mode control

With the QT-6600, each clerk can be programmed to enable or disable operations in the

following modes:

–REF mode

–REG– mode

–REG mode

–X/Z mode

–Program 1 ~ 6 mode

–Manager mode

–Inline X/Z mode

–Inline auto program

–CF backup / restore mode

Also, each clerk can be programmed to enable or disable operations of every function key.

Though the terminal has no actual REG 2 mode, on the page 49 in the Clerk Control

function chapter of this manual, the manager control procedure is described.

Arrangement execution mode programmed in the arrangement key ignores the mode

control program by the clerk.

Please note that if a clerk want to operate an arrangement, he / she should allow to operate

arrangement function.

2-1-6. Operation prompt and error messages

The QT-6600 displays messages to indicate the status of the terminal being operated or

programmed. These messages help to determine the status of the terminal or the required

subsequent action.

2-1-6-1. Operation prompt

Refer to the page 227 of this manual for details. These messages cannot be added, modified

or deleted.

2-1-6-2. Error messages

Refer to the page 224 ~ 227 of this manual for details. Error messages are displayed to

indicate that an error has occurred and a compulsory operation must be performed. All error

messages cannot be added, modified or deleted.

2-1-7. Printing control system

The following describes the control system for printing of receipts, the journal, validation,

slips and X/Z reports.

2-1-7-1. Receipt print control during normal registration

Normally, the receipt is printed to reflect the details of a registration as it is performed, with

the receipt being issued with the finalize operation. By using the <RECEIPT ON/OFF>

key, the receipt issuance status can be turned off to suspend printing and issuance of

receipts when so desired. Pressing the <RECEIPT ON/OFF> key turns the receipt

issuance status on or off, and when the receipt issuance status is On, the icon “RECEIPT

ON” appears.

The following programming can be performed for receipt printing:

R-27

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-1-7-2. Validation print control

The QT-6600 allows use of the slip printer (SP-1300) for validation printing of item

registrations, function registrations and sales totals. To perform validation printing, insert

the validation paper into the slip printer, and then press the <VALIDATION> key

(function code 037).

The following desctription shows the print format for validation performed using the slip

printer.

There are three general types of validation printing:

1) Finalization validation

2) Transaction validation

3) Item validation

Finalization validation is performed following finalization operations with finalize keys.

When a validation is performed following receipt issuance, the sales total or tendered

amount is printed, while partial tendering, the tendered amount for the specified medium

is printed.

Transaction validation is valid for the following function keys:

–Received on account, Paid out, finalization of Pick up or Loan, Check cashing, Minus,

Plus, Discount, Premium, Void, Coupon, Coupon2, Tip, Deposit, Subtotal, Merchan-

dise subtotal keys

You can program the allowable number of validation printings or multiple validation

printing status for the above listed keys.

Also some of these keys can be programmed as validation compulsory, this means that

registration is not permitted until the validation of the former registration has been

performed.

Item validation is performed directly following an item registration listed below.

–Departments

–Subdepartments

–PLUs/ scanning PLUs

You can program the multiple validation printing status for above items.

Description Program location

Receipt “Item consolidation”PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature

Receipt “Sort by group, department”PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature

Print consecutive number on the receipt PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature

Print date / time on the receipt PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature

Vertical double character PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature

Set menu detail on guest / slip PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print PLU number PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print finalized total PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print taxable amount PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print taxable status PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print total number of item sold PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Print customer number (number of covers) PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

One line feed after finalization PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

Time format (24H / 12H) PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

R-28

Application System

Description Program location

Items on the fixed totalizer report PGM3; Report Control1 in General Feature

Items zero skip PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Average spend/item on monthly report PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

PLU order (memory / random code) PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Print / Non print PLU No. on PLU report PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Print / Non print Sales ratio PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Print / Non print Z counter PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Print / Non print Item discount totalizer PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

Print GT PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

2-1-7-3. Slip print control

Connection of an optional slip printer (SP-1300) to the QT-6600 makes it possible to print

transaction details on a slip.

To print a slip, insert a slip paper into the printer, and adjust paper position by entering the

number of printed lines and pressing the <SLIP FEED/RELEASE> key (function code

056) or the <SLIP BACK FEED/RELEASE> key (function code 054) and then press the

<SLIP PRINT> key (function code 055). Or it is possible to find the appropriate slip

printing start line automatically.

After printing a slip, the paper is automatically released.

If the paper is not released for some reasons, press <SLIP FEED/RELEASE> or <SLIP

BACK FEED/RELEASE> to release the paper.

Before using slip printer, you should program the maximum lines of slip.

The following two sections are other features to control slip printing format:

2-1-7-4. Endorsement message print control

The QT-6600 allows printing of endorsement messages on the slip printer (SP-1300) for

check registrations. To perform endorsement message printing, insert the paper into the

slip printer following finalization using the <CHECK> key or check cashing transaction

using the <CHECK> key, and press the following key:

–Endorsement key (function code 039)

Check key and check cashing key can be programmed for compulsory endorsement print.

The endorsement message contents should be programmed into the endorsement message

file (file 033).

2-1-7-5. Check printing print control

The QT-6600 allows printing check tendered amount on a check inserted into the slip

printer. To perform check printing, insert the paper into the slip printer following check

finalization using the <CHECK> key, and press the following key:

–Check print key (function code 012)

Check key can be programmed for compulsory check print. The check printing format is

controlled by the check print file (file 041).

2-1-7-6. X/Z report print control

The QT-6600 can output a report in the read (X) or reset (Z) mode. The following shows

the programming for X/Z print controls:

R-29

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-2. General description of individual function keys

This section describes individual function key that can be assigned to the keys on the

keyboard of QT-6600.

2-2-1. System keys

The system key consist on a non-programmable function key.

The following system keys are available.

1) Numeric keys (0, 1 ~ 9, 00, decimal point*)

These keys are used for inputting numerical data such as PLU codes, amounts, quantities,

etc. These keys must be allocated on the keyboard.

2) Clear key

This key is used for clearing numerical values after they have been input, and after incorrect

function keys have been pressed. This key also can be used to clear errors. This key must

be allocated on the keyboard.

3) Home position key*

This key is used for returning cursor to the home position.

4) End key*

This key is used for moving cursor to the bottom position.

5) Left, right, up, down arrow keys

These keys are used for moving the cursor.

6) Yes key

This key is used for consenting the selection and proceeding steps.

7) No key

This key is used for cancelling the selection and proceeding steps.

8) Mode key

This key is used for changing modes of the terminal. This key shows the allowable mode

keys in the mode pop-up window.

9) ESC/SKIP key

This key is used for terminating a programming sequence, X/Z sequence, and returning the

former window. This key is also used for terminating a report being issued in PGM, X, and

Z mode.

10) Display on/off key

This key is used for turning on / off the terminal.

11) Page up key*

This key is used for turning the window forwards.

12) Page down key*

This key is used for turning the window backwards.

* Allocatable key

R-30

Application System

2-2-2. Finalize keys

This section covers the general description of each finalize key, with its respective options.

Finalize keys have programmable functions which may be used as required.

1) Tender key

This key is used for finalizing transactions. Up to six media in drawer totalizers are

reserved in the fixed totalizer file, and cash key is linked to cash in drawer, charge key to

charge in drawer, check key to check in drawer and credit key to credit in drawer, food

stamp tender key to food stamp in drawer, EBT tender key to EBT in drawer.

When this key is pressed, the total amount of the transaction is calculated. Normally, a

receipt is issued and the drawer opens at the same time. The total amount is added to the

appropriate totalizers and counters, with consecutive numbers being increased by one.

When an amount exceeding the sales amount is received, the change is calculated,

displayed and printed on the receipt.

This key can also be used in combination with other finalize keys for partial tender and can

also be used to specify the type of media during loan, pick up or media change operation.

Programmability: Refer to page 94, 96 of the programming manual.

2) New balance key

This key is used for adding the latest registered total amount to the previous balance to

obtain a new balance.

When this key is pressed, the total amount of the transaction is calculated. Normally, a

receipt is issued.

Programmability: Refer to page 95 of the programming manual.

2-2-3. Transaction keys

Each of the transaction keys have programmable functions which may be used as required.

The general description of each transaction key, with individual options, is outlined on the

following sections.

1) Price inquiry key (Function code 008)

This key is used to confirm the price and descriptors of PLU without registering.

2) Stock inquiry key (Function code 009)

This key is used to confirm the stock quantity and descriptors of PLU without registering.

3) Text recall key (Function code 010)

This key is used to recall characters.

Programmability: Refer to page 97 of the programming manual.

4) Text print key (Function code 011)

This key is used to print the entered characters.

Programmability: Refer to page 97 of the programming manual.

5) Check print key (Function code 012)

This key is used to print the check on the slip printer (SP-1300). Pressing this key allows

the selection from the following list to print on a check.

1. Check amount in Arabic numerals (normal size / double size)

2. Date (normal size / double size)

3. Check print message in the check endorsement message file

This item noted above can be arranged into a check print format according to the needs

of the store. Check printing using this key is valid only for the following operation of the

check key.

Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.

6) Clerk transfer key (Function code 013)

This key is used to transfer opened checks to another clerk.

Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.

R-31

QT-6600 Reference Manual

7) Table transfer key (Function code 014)

This key is used to transfer the contents of a receipt to another check.

Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.

8) Tip key (Function code 015)

This key is used to register tips.

Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.

9) Normal receipt key (Function code 016)

This key is used to change the order status from Bon to normal and from single item sales

to normal.

10) Loan key (Function code 019)

This key inputs the amount of money provided for making change. This operation affects

media totals, rather than sales totals.

Loans are made for all types of money which can be specified by finalize keys.

Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.

11) Received on account key (Function code 020)

This key is used to register amounts received for purposes other than sales transactions.

This transaction affects media totals, rather than sales totals.

Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.

12) Paid out/Euro key (Function code 021)

This key is used to register amounts of paid outs from the terminal. This transaction affects

media totals, rather than sales totals. If the terminal has the file 099 (Euro program file),

this key also works as “Euro” key. Euro key has the following features: (1) Converting the

main currency to the sub currency, when registering a subtotal amount. (2) Specifying sub

currency while entering an amount for payment.

Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.

13) Pick up key (Function code 022)

When sales receipts are removed from the drawer or when the amount in-drawer exceeds

the limit value (sentinel function), the manager performs a pick up operation. This key is

used for this function. This operation affects media totals, rather than sales totals.

Pick ups are made for all types of money which can be specified by finalize keys.

Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.

14) Coupon key (Function code 023)

This key is used for registering coupons. This operation affects the coupon amount in the

coupon totalizers. The registered coupon amounts is not deducted from the department,

PLU or gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)

Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.

15) Deposit key (Function code 025)

This key is used to register deposits.

Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.

16) Minus key (Function code 027)

This key is used to register subtraction. This operation affects the subtraction amount in

the minus key totalizers. The registered amounts is not deducted from the department, PLU

or gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)

Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.

17) Discount key (Function code 028)

This key applies a preset % or manual input % to obtain the discount amount for the last

registered item or subtotal. The registered amount is not deducted from the department,

PLU or gross totalizers but from the net totalizers only. (Selecting GROSS specification)

Programmability: Refer to page 102 of the programming manual.

R-32

Application System

18) Plus key (Function code 029)

This key is used for registering surcharge. This operation affects the surcharge amount in

the plus key totalizers. The registered amounts is not added to the department, PLU or gross

totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)

Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.

19) Premium key (Function code 030)

This key applies a preset % or manual input % to obtain the premium amount for the last

registered item or subtotal.The registered amounts is not added to the department, PLU or

gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)

Programmability: Refer to page 102 of the programming manual.

20) Refund key (Function code 033)

This key declares next input for a return money.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

21) Error correct/Void key (Function code 034)

This key is used to correct the last registered item, discount, premium, partial tendered, etc.

This key also invalidates proceeding data registered for departments subdepartments,

PLUs or set menus only.

Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.

22) Coupon 2 key (Function code 036)

This key is used to register coupons. The registered coupon amounts is deducted from the

department, subdepartment, PLU or gross totalizers and the net totalizers.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

23) Validation key (Function code 037)

This key validates item or transaction amounts on slips. Validation can be made compulsory

for certain function keys. Multiple validation can be prohibited for certain function keys.

24) Receipt key (Function code 038)

This key issues a receipt for the last transaction (post-finalization receipt) when the original

receipt is not issued. This key also issues a guest receipt. The guest receipt can be

designated by seat number.

Programmability: Refer to page 103 of the programming manual.

25) Check endorsement key (Function code 039)

This key is used to print a preset check endorsement using the slip printer.

Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.

26) Non-add key (Function code 040)

This key prints reference numbers (personal check number, card number etc.)

Programmability: Refer to page 104 of the programming manual.

27) Non-add / No sale key (Function code 041)

This key prints reference numbers (personal check number, card number etc.)

This key also opens the drawer between transaction.

Programmability: Refer to page 104 of the programming manual.

28) No sale key (Function code 042)

This key opens the drawer between transaction.

29) Number of customer key (Function code 043)

This key registers the number of customers.

Programmability: Refer to page 105 of the programming manual.

R-33

QT-6600 Reference Manual

30) Arrangement key (Function code 044)

This key is used to activate an arrangement program programmed in the arrangement

file. Any operation that can be performed from the keyboard, as well as mode, can be

programmed in an arrangement program, and can be performed merely by pressing this

key.

The mode control function of this key can be programmed for all modes.

Programmability: Refer to page 105 of the programming manual.

31) Currency exchange key (Function code 045)

This key converts foreign currency to local currency or vice versa using the exchange rate

preset for the key and displays the result.

This key is used for conversions of a home currency subtotal or merchandise subtotal to

equivalent of another country's currency.

This key is also used for conversion of another country's currency payment to the equivalent

of the home currency.

Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.

32) VAT key (Function code 046)

This key is used to print VAT breakdowns.

33) Bill copy key (Function code 047)

This key is used to issue bill copy.

34) PLU number key (Function code 048)

This key is used to enter PLU numbers.

35) Price key (Function code 049)

This key is used in the following transactions to enter a unit price.

–Open department registration

–Subdepartment registration using the subdepartment number key

–Open PLU registration

In case of the registration mentioned above, the Price key is pressed after entering the unit

price to override a unit price preset to the department, subdepartment or PLU. If the preset

price is to be registered as it is, simply press the Price key.

36) Department key (Function code 051)

This key is used to register items for a department.

Programmability: Refer to page 91 of the programming manual.

37) Slip back feed / Release key (Function code 054)

This key is used to back feed slips inserted into the slip printer. This is done by specifying

the number of feed lines. This key is also used to release the slip paper holder if numbers

are not entered.

38) Slip print key (Function code 055)

This key is used to execute a slip printing on the slip printer. Pressing this key prints the sales

details. Actual printing is performed following receipt issuance.

Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.

39) Slip feed / Release key (Function code 056)

This key is used to feed slips inserted into the slip printer. This is done by specifying the

number of feed lines. This key is also used to release the slip paper holder if numbers are

not entered.

40) Tax status shift key (Function code 057)

This key activates tax table which is specified by the tax status programmed for this key.

The tax status is programmed for the departments, subdepartments, PLUs, scanning PLU,

minus, plus, discount and premium keys. Pressing this key during registration converts

taxable item to non taxable, and non taxable item to taxable.

Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.

R-34

Application System

41) Table number key (Function code 058)

This key is used to input table numbers.

42) Food stamp status shift key (Function code 059)

The food stamp status is programmed for the departments, subdepartments, PLUs, minus,

plus, discount and premium keys. Pressing this key during registration converts food

stampable item to non stampable, and non stampable item to stampable.

43) Declaration key (Function code 061)

This key is used to declare cash, check in drawer amount by media. After pressing this key,

input the in drawer amount by media, and press media key. Press this key to terminate the

procedure. The declared amount, in drawer amount and the difference are printed on the

fixed total report.

Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.

44) Tax exempt key (Function code 062)

This key is used to change taxable amounts to nontaxable amounts.

Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.

45) Flat PLU key (Function code 063)

This key is used to register items to flat PLU.

Programmability: Refer to page 88 of the programming manual.

46) Menu shift key (Function code 064)

This key is used to shift PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 15) menu.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

47) Shift PLU key (Function code 065)

This key is used to shift a Flat PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 8) level.

Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

48) Open key (Function code 067)

This key is used to release the maximum amount limit or low digit limit (programmable)

for an amount which exceeds the limit.

Programmability: Refer to page 107 of the programming manual.

49) Open 2 key (Function code 068)

This key is used to suspend the compulsory specifications.

Programmability: Refer to page 107 of the programming manual.

50) First unit price key (Function code 069)

This key is used to register a specific PLU at the first unit price.

51) Second unit price key (Function code 070)

This key is used to register a specific PLU at the second unit price.

52) Clerk number key (Function code 072)

This key is used to assign a clerk’s secret number.

Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.

53) Operator read / reset key (Function code 073)

This key is used to issue a clerk’s individual X/Z report.

Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.

54) Tray total key (Function code 074)

This key is used to obtain the sectional subtotal amount.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

55) Subtotal key (Function code 075)

This key is used to obtain subtotal amount with add-on tax and previous balance.

Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.

R-35

QT-6600 Reference Manual

56) Receipt On / Off key (Function code 076)

This key is used to change the status “Receipt issue” or “No receipt.”

57) Taxable amount subtotal key (Function code 077)

This key is used to obtain taxable amount subtotal.

Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.

58) Operator number key (Function code 078)

This key is used to enter a clerk number during clerk transfer.

59) Merchandise subtotal key (Function code 080)

This key is used to obtain subtotal excluding the add-on tax amount and the previous

balance.

Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.

60) Food stamp subtotal key (Function code 081)

This key is used to obtain food stamp subtotal. This key should be pressed just before

<FOOD STAMP> or <EBT> finalization.

61) Multiplication key (Function code 082)

This key is used for inputting a quantity of items for a multiplication operation. The

maximum quantity that can be registered with this key is 4 integer and 3 decimals. An error

occurs if the result exceeds 8 digits, including the minus sign.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

62) Quantity / For key (Function code 083)

This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also

has a split pricing function. The function is used to calculate the price per unit for particular

items, which are sold in bulk in order to obtain the total amount for the number of units

purchased.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

63) Square key (Function code 084)

This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also

has a square multiplication function.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

64) Selective item subtotal key (Function code 085)

This key is used to obtain the selective item 1 / 2 subtotal amount.

In addition to the common programming, this key has the following option:

–Selective item status 1 / 2

65) Tare key (Function code 087)

This key is used to input tare value for scale registration.

66) Scale key (Function code 088)

This key is used to read weight from the electronic scale or enter weighing value manually.

67) Cube key (Function code 090)

This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also

has a cube multiplication function.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

68) New check key (Function code 091)

This key is used in a check tracking system to input a new check number in order to open

a new check under that number.

Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

R-36

Application System

69) Old check key (Function code 092)

This key is used in a check tracking system to input the number of an existing check

(previously created by the New check key) whose details are stored in the check tracking

memory. Existing checks are reopened to perform further registration or to finalize them.

Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

70) New / Old check key (Function code 093)

This key is used in a check tracking system to input check numbers in order to open new

checks and to reopen existing checks. When the clerk inputs a check number, the terminal

checks to see if that number already exists in the check tracking memory. If there is no

matching number in the memory, a new check is opened under the input number. If the

check number input matches a number already stored in the memory, that check is

reopened for further registration or finalization.

Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

71) Add check key (Function code 094)

This key is used in a check tracking system to combine the details of more than one check

into a single check.

72) Separate check key (Function code 095)

This key is used in a check tracking system to separate selected items or to separate by seat

number from one check to another check.

73) Room number key (Function code 100)

This key is used to recall the customer’s information from the hotel server by room

number..

74) Room message key (Function code 101)

This key is used to display/ print the message for the designated customer.

75) OBR (Optical Barcode Reader) key (Function code 103)

This key is used to enter scanning PLU code manually.

76) Price change key (Function code 104)

This key is used to change the item price of scanning PLU in registering.

Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.

77) Clock-in/out key (Function code 108)

This key is used to register the time when employees start/finish their job.

Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.

78) Break-in / out key (Function code 109)

This key is used to register the starting / finishing time when employees have a recess.

Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.

79) Coupon number key (Function code 110)

This key is used to enter coupon number for registering mix and match discount.

Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.

80) Substitution key (Function code 111)

Replaces group PLU with a PLU not preset in the pulldown menu.

81) Ketten Bon key (Function code 113)

This key is used to enter quantities for multiplication. Multiplication by this key issues

singular order prints.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

82) House Bon key (Function code 114)

This key is used to register items for in-store use.

R-37

QT-6600 Reference Manual

83) Post entry key (Function code 115)

This key is used in a check tracking or clerk interrupt system to indicate the reserved item

of set menu and register it as a fixed item later on.

–Enter post entry

Press this key while the window is opened, the key descriptor appears on the screen and

it is registered as a reserved item.

–Fix post entry

After finishing the set menu registration, move the cursor on to the reserved item, press

this key again, then the appropriate window will be opened to fix it.

84) Round repeat key (Function code 116)

This key is used to register the same items which were ordered just before.

Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

85) Open check key (Function code 117)

This key is used to issue an open check report of an assigned clerk.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

86) Media change key (Function code 118)

This key is used to change media in drawer amounts. Pressing this key enters media change

operation.

87) Seat number key (Function code 119)

This key is used to enter and print seat number.

88) Eat-in key (Function code 128)

This key is used to specify if the customer eats in the restaurant. Before closing a

transaction, press this key.

Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.

89) Takeout key (Function code 129)

This key is used to specify if the customer takes out items. Before closing a transaction,

press this key for the tax exemption.

Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.

90) Store key (Function code 130)

This key is used for storing the check number of the registered items. Allocate this key to

the terminal at the drive-through entrance. When this key is pressed, registered item data

will be stored, and then these data will transfer to the youngest check number.

Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.

91) Recall key (Function code 131)

This key is used for recalling the transferred check number by the store key. When you

press this key, the check number will appear in order of the oldest record.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

92) Subdepartment key (Function code 133)

This key is used to register items for the subdepartment.

Programmability: Refer to page 90 of the programming manual.

93) Subdepartment number key (Function code 134)

This key is used to enter subdepartment numbers.

94) Department number key (Function code 135)

This key is used to enter department numbers.

95) List key (Function code 136)

This key is used to display menu lists.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

96) List number key (Function code 137)

This key is used to designate list number.

R-38

Application System

97) Number look up key (Function code 138)

This key is used to register a scanning PLU item whose scanning code is set to this key.

98) Split payment (Dutch account) key (Function code 140)

This key is used to share the total payment by customer.

Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.

99) Not found PLU key (Function code 142)

This key is used to declare an item which has not been set in the scanning PLU file yet as

not found PLU item. After occuring “Error 028”, press this key and perform linked

department registration.

100)Customer number key (Function code 148)

This key is used to enter customer ID number.

Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.

101)Payment key (Function code 149)

This key is used to declare the following transactions as payment.

102)Swipe key (Function code 172)

This key is used to enter before swiping a magnetic card/ scanning a barcode.

Programmability: Refer to page 116 of the programming manual.

103)Electronic journal display key (Function code 207)

This key is used to display the stored journal.

104)Display mode key (Function code 219)

This key is used to change display modes (normal mode/item consolidation mode).

105)Cancel key (Function code 236)

Invalidates all preceding data registered for departments, PLUs and set menus within a

transaction. This key must be pressed before the transaction involving the data to be

invalidated is finalized. It is also effective even after calculation of subtotal amount.

Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.

106)Worktime key (Function code 237)

This key is used to clock-in/ out in simple time and attendance operation.

Programmability: Refer to page 116 of the programming manual.

107)Item search key (Function code 246)

Use this key to search an item by its name, pulldown group or flat-PLU.

Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.

108)Order character change key (Function code 252)

This key is used to change the order character temporarily. The order characters not only

of the item but in the order character table can be printed.

Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.

109)Function list key (Function code 253)

This key is used to display function list. After displaying a function list, you can input the

keys in the list.

Programmability: Refer to page 117 of the programming manual.

110)Location change key (Function code 260)

Use this key to select the pop-up window which shows the table layout of each floor/part

of the restaurant.

Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.

111)Table sharing key (Function code 261)

Use this key to assign one table to two or more customer groups.

R-39

QT-6600 Reference Manual

OrderOrder

Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

CHK/M

CHK/BM

PRN (1) PRN (2)

LAN Printer RS-232C Printer

Order OrderOrder

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

Up to 16 remote printers

Slip

inline

QT-6600 QT-6600

QT-6600

buffer

Remote

Printer

2-3. Remote printer control

Up to 16 printers for printing kitchen orders etc.

2-3-1. Remote printer system configuration

Please refer to page 17 for the system configuration.

The printing processing of the remote printer is performed as shown in the figure below.

1A transaction is made at a terminal.

2The terminal sends printing data to the terminal with remote printer.

3The terminal with remote printer sends data to the remote printer.

QT-6600 QT-6600

QT-6600

buffer

Remote

Printer

RS-232C printer

LAN printer

1A transaction is made at a terminal.

2The terminal sends printing data to the terminal which controls the remote printer.

3The terminal which controls the remote printer sends data to the remote printer.

Note: Please do not define more than two terminals controlling one LAN printer.

R-40

Application System

2-3-2. Remote printer control setting

Remote printer settings:

After changing the DIP switch configuration, remote printer initialization (power on by

pressing the <FEED> key) is necessary.

UP-400

Dip switch is located at the bottom of the printer.

SW No. Function

Reset by DTR

reserved

Protocol

Transmision speed

Parity

undifined

Low power comsumption

undifined

ON OFF

Ye s N o

--- fixed

DTR/DSR XON/XOFF

See transmission

speed setting

See paritysetting

--- ---

Ye s N o

--- ---

SW No.

OFF

UP-360 Bottom view

1Parity setting

Non

Even

Odd

Non

OFF

Transmission

speed setting

bps

4800

9600

19200

38400

SW No.

OFF

UP-360

Dip switch is located at the bottom of the printer.

SW No. Function

Reset by DTR

reserved

Protocol

Transmision speed

Parity

Busy status

Low power comsumption

3mm feed after auto-cut

ON OFF

Yes N o

--- fixed

DTR/DSR XON/XOFF

See transmission

speed setting

See paritysetting

BF full + offline

BF full

Yes No

Invalid Valid

SW No.

OFF

UP-400 Bottom view

SW No. Function

Data reception error

Bit length

Reception buffer full

Set ID/ set IP

Use DHCP server

Set default value

Undefined

ON OFF

Ignore Print “?”

7 bit 8 bit

*1 *2

Set IP Set ID

Enable Disable

Yes No

Parity setting

Non

Even

Odd

Non

OFF

Transmission

speed setting

bps

4800

9600

19200

38400

SW No.

OFF

Switch 1

Switch 2

*1 Until the non-processing data in the reception buffer

decreases from 31 bytes to 21 bytes

*2 Until the room of the reception buffer increases from

1k bytes to 2k bytes

Shadowed parts indicate defaults.

R-41

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Memory allocation of files required when remote printers are connected

•Printer buffer (file 035)

(Reallocate these files, if the file sizes are not enough.)

Other setting

•General machine features

2-3-3. Remote printer output control

The following print items are controlled by programming.

•0 to 9 line feed above and below printing (only for “order”)

•Dashed line print control (only for “order”)

•Paper auto cut

•Data communication speed (only for RS-232C printer)

•Backup remote printer specification

•Print color (normal / reverse or black / red) control: included in the item programming

(only for “order”)

•Output remote logical order number: included in the item programming

(only for “order”)

•Remote printer output in training mode (only for “order”)

•Item amount printing (only for “order”)

•Alert when remote printer is down

2-3-4. Remote printer backup processes

Remote printer error or terminal with remote printer error

In case of the backup printer is assigned, when the terminal which sends printing data to

remote printer detects the remote printer or the terminal with remote printer abnormality,

the remote printer cross backup (see the next section) is made. In case of no backup printer

is assigned or the backup printer is also downed, the data will be able to display on the

screen.

Remote printer cross backup

When there is more than one remote printer in the system, a setting can be made to enable

remote printer cross backup.

Cross backup (example):

Remote printer 1 backup → Remote printer 2

Remote printer 2 backup → Remote printer 1

Remote printer 1 with terminal 1 backup → Remote printer 2 with terminal 2

Remote printer 2 with terminal 2 backup → Remote printer 3 with terminal 1

Note that remote printer backup extends a single level only. If remote printer 1 goes down

in the above example, remote printer 2 performs backup printing. If remote printer 2 now

goes down, remote printer 3 does not take over backup printing.

R-42

Application System

Remote printer print sample

1) Order printing (Normal receipt printing with amount)

Check No.

123456

MC #01 —Check number / Machine ID

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001230 —Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.

Lemon Tea

•1.00 —Order with amount

*Soft Drinks*

—Order character

Coffee

•2.00

—Cut

2) Order printing (Single bon/double bon)

Check No.

123456

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001234

*Soft Drinks*

—Single Bon

1 Lemon Tea

—Cut

Check No.

123456

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001234

*Soft Drinks*

—Double Bon

2 Coffee

*STUB*

—Double Bon message

Check No.

123456

MC #01 —Check number/Machine ID

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001234 —Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.

*Soft Drinks*

—Order character

2 Coffee

3) Order printing (Normal receipt printing without amount)

Check No.

123456

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001256

*Soft Drinks*

1 Lemon Tea

2 Coffee

R-43

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4) Order printing (Set menu/preparation/condiment)

Check No.

123456

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-2003 12:34 001267

2 Steak Set

—Set menu

Medium

—Detail item

Salad

1 Pizza

—Main item

Soft

—Preparation

Cheese

—Condiment

Tomato

1 Pizza

—Main item

#123456 —Main item PLU No.

Soft

—Preparation (with quantity / PLU No.)

#000001

Cheese

—Condiment (with quantity / PLU No.)

#000002

Tomato

#000003

R-44

Application System

OrderOrder

Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

CHK/M

CHK/BM

PRN (1) PRN (2)

LAN Printer RS-232C Printer

Order OrderOrder

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

Up to 16 remote printers

Slip

inline

2-4. Check tracking system

2-4-1. Shared check tracking system

Up to 12 terminals can be included in the cluster and check tracking can be performed for

multiple terminals connected to inline. This means that any terminal can be used to recall

a temporary closed check of one’s cluster for additional registration or finalization.

System configuration (1 cluster system)

System configuration (multi cluster system)

OrderOrder

Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals/cluster Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals/cluster

CHK/MCHK/BMCHK/M

CHK/BM

PRN (1) PRN (2)

OrderOrder

PRN (1) PRN (2)

Up to 8 remote printers/system (in all cluster)

Up to 32 QT-6600 terminals/system (all cluster total)

Slip Slip

LAN Printer RS-232C Printer

R-45

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Shared check tracking processing in one cluster is performed as shown in the figure shown

above.

1A shared check operation (such as “new check” or “old check” etc.) is made at a

terminal.

2The terminal sends the check number to the check tracking master and the backup

master. The master and backup master turn on the busy status.

3The master sends back the check data (if the check number exists) or opens a new check

number.

4A shared check transaction is finalized (by “new balance” or other finalize key).

5The terminal sends the check data to the master and the backup master. And the master/

backup master clears the busy status of the check number.

2-4-2. Shared check tracking requirement

The following definition of memory allocation is required in each terminal before you can

perform shared check tracking.

•Number of check tracking tables:

For satellite, minimum one, for master, more than the number of estimated open checks

should be defined.*

*In case of using the next block **, one more check tracking table is consumed.

•Number of items/tables (per one item block **):

This is not the maximum number of items or functions but the number ordinarily

registered items or functions per one table. If the number of items or functions exceeds

this value during registration, the next block is used automatically for the following

transactions.

** Number of item blocks:

Ordinarily, the registration requires one item blocks—but in a party for example—more

items are registered per one table. So it is necessary to define how many item blocks can

be used.

The maximum number of items or functions per one check is defined by the formula:

= (Number of items / tables) × (Number of item blocks (1 ~ 10))

When memory near end and memory end happens during registration, an error occurs.

See section A-5. Error messages of this manual.

2-4-3. Data backup when the master goes down

When the system has the backup master for the check tracking system, registered check

tracking data are stored both master and backup master automatically.

As soon as the system detects master down, the backup master roles as master for the check

tracking system.

(It is necessary to switch to backup master manually. See the “System down & Recovery”

chapter on page 9 of the installation & down recovery manual.)

When the system has no backup master for the check tracking system or both master and

backup master become down, no more check tracking operation and clerk interrupt

operation can be made.

Satellite

Master

Backup

master

Check

tracking

Check

tracking

R-46

Application System

2-5. Other check tracking system control

2-5-1. The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization

There are two timings to clear detail and index files.

1. The check is cleared after printing finalized data on slip or guest check receipt, or the

check is also cleared when the new or old check operation is made on the terminal

finalized the transaction.

2. The check is cleared after printing finalized data on slip or guest check receipt, or the

check is also cleared when the same finalized check number is assigned in new check

operation.

This option is set on the page 46 of the programming manual.

2-5-2. Table transfer

This function is used for transferring the contents of a receipt to another check.

The detail data can be excluded from the transferring check by programming (ST transfer).

There are two cases depends on the status of the transferring check.

1. If the transfer check is not used.

The entered check number is written.

2. The check number is already used.

Add the contents to the existing contents.

This option is set on the page 98 of the programming manual.

2-5-3. Store and recall

These functions are used for the driving through purchase.

The check number used in store operation is defined by check No. range programming.

2-5-3-1 Store

This function is used for storing the check No. of the registered items. The Detail / Index

at the drive-through entrance record the registered items and store it’s check No., and then

print out the temporary receipt. A customer receives this temporary receipt, and drives up

to the exit with this to receive the ordered item. The stored data transfer to the check

tracking master/backup master.

2-5-3-1 Recall

This function is used for recalling the transferred check No. to total the sum. The terminal

at the drive-through exit recalls transferring check No. in order of the oldest record. A

customer can receive the ordered items, and pay for them.

R-47

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1. Without entering new check No., register items. After all ordered item have been

registered, press the <STORE> key at the entrance to summarize the registered items.

The check No. is issued automatically. The contents of these check No. transfer to the

check tracking master / backup Master.

2. Press the <RECALL> key to recall the check at the exit.

Important

•A four-digit check No. should be used.

•When Open Check Z (All) report is printed out, the check No. range will be reset. After

this operation, the next check No. by using Store function will be the range start.

•This function works with the option “Clearing CHK/TBL No. by using the same number

again” to “Check number” only. (Refer to page 46 of the programming manual)

R/J

Entrance Exit

Temporary receipt

Order receipt

Receipt

KITCHEN

Store Recall

Hamburger

French Fries

Hot Coffee

CHK No.100

Cheese Burger

Orange Juice

CHK No.101

Press the <STORE> key →

CHK No.100

Hamburger

French Fries

Hot Coffee

CHK No.101

Cheese Burger

Orange Juice

Press the <RECALL> key →

PRN (2)

R/J

PRN (1)

Order

R-48

Application System

Clerk 1 Clerk 2 Clerk 3

Registration

Finalization

Guest

receipt issuance

Guest

receipt issuance

Guest

receipt issuance

Sign on clerk 2 (clerk 1 registration put on hold)

Sign on clerk 3 (clerk 2 registration put on hold)

Sign on clerk 1

Sign on clerk 2

Sign on clerk 3

Sign on clerk 1.

Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 1.

Sign on clerk 2.

Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 2.

Sign on clerk 3.

Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 3.

2-6. Clerk control function

2-6-1. Clerk interrupt

The terminal can be programmed to allow the clerk interrupt function, which makes it

possible for multiple clerk to simultaneously use the same register. If a clerk starts

registration of a transaction, another can be interrupt the original registration and begin a

new one. The original clerk can later resume the interrupted original registration. You can

use the clerk interrupt function with the check tracking function.

Notes

1) Error correct operation

The error correct operation cannot be performed for registrations made before a clerk

change. The error correct operation should be performed before clerk change.

2) Guest receipt

A guest receipt can be issued following clerk change, and receipts can be issued

separately for each clerk.

3) Cancel operation

The cancel operation can affect the entire transaction (multiple receipts: complete

cancellation) or only the same transaction (one receipt) by programming the <CAN-

CEL> key.

R-49

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-6-2. Clerk detail memory

The terminal can summarize any daily / periodic total memory (such as fixed totalizer,

department, PLU, etc.) clerk by clerk.

After initialization, clerks have 10 detail memories which are assigned to gross, net, and

4 media in drawers. If you want to set more detail memories to clerks, allocate clerk detail

memory and detail link memory at the same time.

Clerk detail memory: File 011 / 111 / 211 / 311 / 411 / 511 / 611

Clerk detail link: File 030

2-6-3. Clerk training

Clerk training can be performed when employing new clerks or retraining clerks.

Training is normally performed during working hours, and the QT-6600 has the following

training functions.

1) It is not necessary to remove one terminal from the system for training purpose during

working hours.

2) Programming options, etc., are controlled exactly the same way as a working clerk.

3) Receipts are different from those normally used. The training receipts are filled with

training filler (“*” default.)

2-6-4. Manager mode control

There is no actual REG 2 mode on the terminal, but you can control some functions (you

want) under manager control.

Preparation for this function:

1) Set “NO” to any functions you want to disable for CLERKS in the Allowed function 1

~ 5 list in the clerk programming. (See page 76 ~ 78 of the programming manual.)

2) Set the type of operator to “Manager” for the manager. (See page 74 of the programming

manual.)

Operation for this function:

1. When the transaction is prohibited, the terminal displays

error message and the clerk calls the manager.

2. The manager press <MODE> and enters “2”, press the <REG

> key.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0002 •20.00

1 PLU0003 •30.00

Operator mistake

3 •60.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0002 •20.00

1 PLU0003 •30.00

Operation Code ?

-----

3 •60.00

R-50

Application System

3. The manager enters his/her secret code and press the <YES>

key. After this operation, the prohibited transaction can be

registered.

4. Perform manager operation (in this example; void opera-

tion).

5. Pressing the <MODE> and <REG> key is required, when the

manager returns his/ her office.

Note: Another manager’s intervention:

1. Manager signs on.

2. Open clerk window.

3. Designate appropriate clerk.

4. Perform manager operation.

5. Manager signs off.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0002 •20.00

PLU0003 -30.00

2 •30.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0002 •20.00

1 PLU0003 •30.00

REG2 Mode

0.00

3 •60.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0002 •20.00

REG Mode

0.00

2 •30.00

R-51

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-7. Arrangement key function and scheduler

The arrangement key function provides a macro command function for the QT-6600

system. Any operation that can be performed using the keyboard of the QT-6600 can be

programmed to the arrangement file (file 038 ~ 438). Any operation programmed to the

arrangement file can be performed by pressing the arrangement key (function code 044).

Multi operations can be programmed into one arrangement program, and also entry of a

numeric parameter can be included anywhere in the arrangement program.

For example, when an arrangement program is programmed for executing fixed totalizer

Z consolidation for all terminal and the program is linked to an arrangement key, that

operation can be executed simply by pressing the arrangement key or attaching the i-

Button key to the receiver.

The scheduler function is provided for scheduled execution of arrangement key operation.

Execution of every specified time, as well as scheduled execution, can be performed using

this function.

The scheduler file (file 062) must be reserved to use the scheduler function.

2-7-1. Arrangement key function

The arrangement file and arrangement keys must be reserved for the QT-6600 to use the

arrangement key function.

The arrangement file is used to store the arrangement programs. An arrangement file

record is 24 bytes long, and a maximum of 9999 records can be reserved. Arrangement

programs are programmed using character data, and multiple arrangement programs can

be programmed in the arrangement file.

Multiple arrangement keys can be preset on the keyboard, and each key can be linked to

an arrangement program. The linked arrangement program is then called and executed by

pressing the arrangement key.

The following table shows the command parameters of the arrangement key function that

can be interpreted and executed by the QT-6600.

Command parameters can only be separated by spaces.

Note that spaces cannot be included within the command parameter.

Details of command parameters and their functions are explained next.

1) Number input

There are two methods to enter a number in an arrangement program.

–Constant number input

Preset a fixed number (constant value) enclosed in parentheses in the arrangement

program.

Example: To enter “1234” → preset (1234)

–Input of a single number when the arrangement program is executed.

A single number can be entered using the arrangement key. The number entered can be

used at any position and any time in the arrangement program.

Generally, an input number is temporarily stored in the work area (number entry buffer)

reserved for data processing, and is cleared after the processing is performed. With the

arrangement key function, a parameter save buffer is provided for saving the contents

of the number entry buffer. When a “%GET” command is encountered in an

arrangement program during processing, the data in the number entry buffer is saved

to the parameter save buffer. Set “%PUT” command to use the data saved in the

parameter buffer. The “%PUT” command can be used to load the data saved in the

parameter save buffer into the numeric entry buffer. These commands may be included

as often as necessary. The data in the parameter save buffer is changed only when a

“%GET” command is processed.

R-52

Application System

Note:

•Set a “%GET” command, first, to use the number entered by the arrangement key later.

•When the “%GET” is programmed following constant number input, the constant

number is saved to the parameter save buffer.

•Numbers input using a “%PUT” command or by “([number])” are entered to the

number entry buffer in the same way as numbers input using the 10-key pad.

2) Key function specification

Any function key can be specified for an arrangement key function. :

[function code]:[record number] →Used for ordinary function keys

The numbers can be specified for zero suppression.

Note:

The arrangement key itself, cannot be programmed for in an arrangement program.

3) Mode setting

Any mode key can be specified for an arrangement key function. :

[function code]:[mode definition]→Used for mode keys

Note:

121:01 : REG mode

121:02 : REF mode

121:03 : REG– mode

122:01 : X/Z mode:

122:02 : MGR mode:

122:03 : Collection/Consolidation mode:

122:04 : Auto-program mode:

122:05 : CF card:

123:01 : PGM1 mode:

123:02 : PGM2 mode:

123:03 : PGM3 mode:

123:04 : PGM4 mode:

123:05 : PGM5 mode:

123:06 : PGM6 mode:

4) Print control

There are two commands for controlling the printer:

PON : Output printout data.

POFF : Not output printout data.

R-53

QT-6600 Reference Manual

5) Controlling the flow of arrangement command execution

There are 32 commands for controlling the flow of arrangement command execution:

:Snnnn : This is a start mark of an arrangement. “nnnn” (4-digits code) are used for

arrangement table number set to each arrangement key.

(nnnn) :“nnnn (no digit limitation)” means numeric entry.

NN:nnnn :“NN” is a function code which is executed in this arrangement, “nnnn” is the

record No. of the function.

:[label] : Preset the label (name of specific position) to specify the jump destination

point in the arrangement file. The actual data for labels can be freely

designated.

Example: To specify “LABEL-1” as label → :LABEL-1

G:[label] : This is an absolute jump command. If the system encounters this command,

command execution flow unconditionally jumps and continues from the

point preset by the label.

I > ([number]):[label] : This is a conditional jump command. If the system

encounters this commands, the value in the number

entry buffer is compared with the specific number. If the

value in the buffer is larger than the specified number,

the command execution flow jumps and continues from

the point preset by the label. If the condition is not match

with the above-mentioned condition, the step advances

to the next command.

I < ([number]):[label] : This is a conditional jump command. If the value in the

number entry buffer is less than the specified number,

the command execution flow jumps to the point preset

by the label. If the condition is not match with the above-

mentioned condition, the step advances to the next

command.

I – ([number]):[label] : This is a conditional jump command. If the system

encounters this command, the value in the numeric

entry buffer is compared with the specific number. If the

value in the buffer is equal to the specific number, the

command execution flow jumps and continues from the

point preset by the label. If the condition is not match

with the above-mentioned condition, the step advances

the next command.

KNO1 : This is a command to enter the <#-1> key.

KNO2 : This is a command to enter the <#-2> key.

NE : This is a command to wait for numeric entry. After entering numerics,

press the <ARRANGEMENT> key to continue the arrangement

program.

B:nn : This is a command to sound buzzer for nn (nn = 01 ~ 99) seconds.

R-54

Application System

?: Force to execute the arrangement even if an error occurred during the

arrangement.

ANO : Disable clerk auto sign-off.

AYES : Enable clerk auto sign-off.

CFFMT :Format CF card.

CFSVnnn’mmmm’ :Backup to CF card (nnn: command code, mmmm: file name).

CFLDnnn’mmmm’ :Restore from CF card (nnn: command code, mmmm: file name).

JCL : Clear electronic journal older half data

JCLA : Clear all electronic journal data

CLPn:m : Set the default @ menu shift number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 2) and Status/ stay

down @ menu shift assignment to “m” (m = 0 ~ 2) of all clerk.

CLMn:m : Set the default menu shift number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 15) and Status/ stay

down menu shift assignment to “m” (m = 0 ~ 2) of all clerk.

CLSn : Set the default shift PLU level number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 8).

211:nnnn : Press the “ESC” key. (nnnn: record No.)

212:nnnn : Press the “YES” key. (nnnn: record No.)

213:nnnn : Press the “NO” key. (nnnn: record No.)

%GET : Read from key buffer. (incl. decimal point)

%PUT : Write to key buffer. (incl. decimal point)

CLL0n : Set the default clerk pop-up window number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 9).

PLY:nn : Play the 7nn (nn: 01 ~ 10) sound file.

!:sss : Wait the next step for “sss” (ss = 001 ~ 327) sec.

F:m:nn : Sending data (designated by “nn”) to the terminal (designated by “m”)

via FTP.

“m” means the rec-# of file-912, “nn” means the rec-# of file-913

6) End of the arrangement programs

The end command “E” must be included at the end (exit) point of an arrangement program.

R-55

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-7-2. Arrangement program example

This section shows examples of arrangement programs.

The following example shows an arrangement program that executes X consolidation of

the file set in the batch 1 ~ 9 files for all terminals.

Example:

Programming the following operation for the arrangement table 12

–Set the mode to Inline X/Z.

–Enter operation code “1111100000000”.

–Wait for the numeric entries (batch number).

–Enter the <#-2> key.

–Enter the <ESC> key.

:S0012 ; Designate the table number (mandatory)

122:03 ; Set the mode to Inline X/Z.

NE ; Wait for the batch number

I<(0):ERR1 ; If the input number is less than 0, the process jumps to the ERR1.

I>(9):ERR1 ; If the input number is larger than 9, the process jumps to the ERR1.

%GET ; Save the entered number to the parameter save area.

202:0031 ; Press “Clear” button.

(1111100000000) ; Input the operation code for system command

%PUT ; Pick up the entered number from the parameter save area.

KNO2 ; Specify the <#-2> key for entering the operation code.

211:0045 ; Specify the <ESC> key to execute this operation.

:ERR1 ; When the input number is not 1 to 9, the following commands are

processed.

E; End the program (mandatory).

2-7-3. Scheduled execution of arrangement function

An arrangement key function can be executed on a scheduled basis. In order to execute an

arrangement key function on a scheduled basis, it is necessary to make appropriate settings

in the scheduler file (file 062).

There are two functions for execution on a scheduled basis:

1) Execute an arrangement key function at the specified time.

2) Interval execution of an arrangement key function by setting start time, ending time,

and the interval.

See the page 48 of the programming manual for programming details.

R-56

Application System

2-8. Making graphic logo

A graphic logo can be printed on UP-400 / UP-360 receipt. This graphic logo is stored in

the graphic logo file ( file 047 for UP-400 / UP-360), and printed at the top of the receipt

instead of a normal logo message.

This graphic logo data cannot be made by the terminal program, it can be made only by PC

and downloaded from PC.

2-8-1. About graphic logo

Graphic logo size: 432 × 104 or 432 × 208 pixels

Printing sample:

**************************************

* QT-6600 TERMINAL *

* GRAPHIC LOGO AREA *

**************************************

*******COMMERCIAL MESSAGE LINE 1*******

*******COMMERCIAL MESSAGE LINE 2*******

*******COMMERCIAL MESSAGE LINE 3*******

*******COMMERCIAL MESSAGE LINE 4*******

2-8-2. Making graphic logo procedure

Before following this procedure please allocate “Graphic logo” file (file 047) on the terminal.

1. Making a bit-map image file:

(432 × 104 or 432 × 208 pixels; 1-bit color for UP-400 / UP-360).

2. Convert this bit-map file to the internal file by executing the PC tool.

PC sends the converted data to the terminal via online automatically.

3. Select “Print Graphic” option in the message control of the general feature in the PGM

3 mode.

4. Send the graphic logo to the printer by executing “Printer Logo Send” in the MGR mode.

R-57

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-9. Hourly item

This function enables to memorize the detailed data of quantity and amount / price of each

item dealt hourly.

It is possible to calculate the proceeds and record the hourly item in any totalizer, and also

it is possible to print out as an hourly item report.

2-9-1. Programming necessary files before using hourly item function.

Hourly item function requires the following files to function properly, so they must be

programmed before using it. See the programming manual for the details on format of

individual files.

– Time zone file

This file is used to specify the time zone for the detail items individually. You can enter

the starting time and the ending time of the time zone, moreover specify the cycle time that

indicates an unit of the appropriate intervals.

– Hourly item link file

This file is used to record the Hourly item which links with the appropriate time zone. You

can also specify the particular totalizer for each time zone.

– Hourly item

This file is used to store the contents of the quantity and amount of each registered item.

The following seven files enable to link the data for hourly item link file: fixed totalizer,

function, subdepartment, PLU, department, group, void reason.

A maximum of 20 records

corresponds to each time

zone.

08:00->09:00

Hamburger 2 $2.00

French Fries 3 $1.50

----------------------------------------

$3.50

09:00->10:00

Cheese Burger 2 $3.00

Hot Coffee 2 $0.50

----------------------------------------

$3.50

13:00->13:15

Apple Pie 1 $1.00

Hot Milk 1 $1.00

----------------------------------------

Hourly item report example

Start End Cycle

Time Time

08:00 12:00 01:00

13:00 14:00 00:15

• • •

Time zone file

REC No. File No.

0001 004

0011 001

• •

0005 012

0008 012

• •

Hourly item link

Zone

20 items

R-58

Application System

2-10. Time and attendance

This function allows shop owners to control his / her employees’ working condition. Time

& attendance require the following files.

– Employee file

This file is used to regulate the labor conditions.

You can program the type of job, the maximum work hours in a week or shift schedule

of a day per employee.

– Job code file

This file is used to classify the types of job. You can program the general work pay and

the overtime pay ratio per job file.

If some employees have a common job, you can divide the job code individually in case

their pay ratio is different.

– Schedule file

This file is used to administrate the employees’ schedule. You can assign a starting and

an ending time, a grace period, break minutes allowed, and the default job code for the

shift. It is possible to record maximum 21 shifts (3 shifts × 7 days) per employee for the

schedule file.

Grace period – this is a period of time in minutes which allows an employee to clock-in /

out before / after their scheduled times. Grace period works in conjunction with the

schedule. If the scheduler is not being utilized then the grace period inputs indicated

below become inactive.

Grace period before start time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may

clock-in before the scheduled clock-in time.

Grace period after start time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may

clock-in after the scheduled clock-in time.

Grace period before end time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may

clock-out before the scheduled clock-out time.

Grace period after end time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may

clock-out after the scheduled clock-out time.

(See “4-1-15. Programming time & attendance” for the programming manual.)

Start

Time

End

Time

Break

Time

Grace Before

Start

Grace After

Start

Grace Before

End

Grace After

End

9:00

13:00

16:00

9:00

13:00

16:00

12:00

15:00

18:00

12:00

15:00

18:00

00:15

Job

Code

Shift

Mon

day

Tuesday

•

Each employee can have 3 shifts per day. The schedule file can hold 7 days schedule.

So, totally 21 files can be registered in this file.

•

Sunday

R-59

QT-6600 Reference Manual

– Work time file

This file is used to administrate each employees’ weekly hourly wages, work hours.

– Time zone file

This file is used to administrate the cycle time. You can specify the length of time zone.

2-10-1. Corresponding relations of the file

Employees’ job assign

This function is used to assign a job to each employee. Before assigning the job, be sure

to program the details of the jobs. Every employee file can link to some job code files

(maximum 4 jobs), so some employees may link to the same job code file. But be sure to

make individual job files if the employees work under different hourly wages.

Job 1

Job 2

Job 3

Job 4

Job 5

Job 6

Employee 1

Employee 2

Employee 3

Employee 4

Job code

R-60

Application System

Employee’s Schedule and total business results per week

•

Employee 1

Employee 2

First week

Second week

First week

Second week

Monday

Tuesday

Sunday

Monday

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Sunday

Monday

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Employee 1

Employee 2

Employee 3

Employee 4

Employee 1

Employee 2

Monday

Tuesday

Sunday

Monday

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 3

Shift 1

Shift 2

Shift 3

Schedule

Work time

R-61

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Calculating the total wages of the employees per hour

Calculating the total wages of the employees per week

Weekly wages per employee

= Total of daily wages *1 (Worktime < Programmed weekly worktime value)

= Total of weekly wages *2 (Worktime Programmed weekly worktime value)

*1 Daily wages

= Regular time cost + Overtime cost

= (Pay rate / job) * (Daily regular time) + (Pay rate / job) * (Daily overtime ratio) * (Daily

over time 1) + (Pay rate / job)* (Daily 2nd overtime ratio) * (Daily overtime 2)

cf. Daily overtime 1: Programmed daily work time ~ Programmed daily overtime

Daily overtime 2: Programmed daily overtime ~

*2 Weekly wages

= Total of daily wages + Overtime cost 1 + Overtime cost 2

Total of daily wages + (Pay rate / job) * (Weekly overtime pay ratio) * (Weekly overtime 1)

+ (Pay rate / job) * (Pay rate / job) * (Weekly 2nd overtime ratio) * (Weekly overtime 2)

cf. Weeky overtime 1: Programmed weekly work time ~ Programmed weekly overtime

Weekly overtime 2: Programmed weekly overtime ~

Flow of Time & Attendance operation

The following flow shows the order of Time & Attendance function by pressing the

specified keys: It is possible to specify one key as both <CLOCK-IN> and <CLOCK-

OUT> function, or specify two keys separately. ( Refer to “4-3-7-33 Worksheet for clock-

in/clock-out” in the programming manual for details.)

CLOCK-IN →

(

BREAK-IN →BREAK-OUT

)

→CLOCK-OUT

Time zone

Zone 1 Cycle 1

Zone 1 Cycle 2

Zone 1 Cycle 3

Zone 2 Cycle 1

Zone 2 Cycle 2

Hourly/Labor

Totalizer 1

Totalizer 2

Totalizer 3

Totalizer 4

Totalizer 5

R-62

Application System

2-10-2. Clock-in operation

This function is used to register the Starting work time. If the total worktime is greater than the daily/ weekly

programmed time, minor employee cannot be clocked in. (Error 169 occurs) In this case, clock-in by manager.

2-10-2-1. Clock-in operation (1)

Program: Not using the window and impossible to specify job code.

Allow to specify job code = NO, Display job code window = NO

(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)

Operation

1. XXXXXX <CLOCK-IN>

When this message appears, press the <YES> key to register

the start of working hours.

XXXXXX

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL 11:59 AM

Clock-in OK?

0.00

Employee No.

R-63

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-10-2-2. Clock-in operation (2)

Program: Allow to specify job code = YES, Display job code window = NO

(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)

Operation

1. XXXXXX . YY <CLOCK-IN>

When this message appears, press the <YES> key to register

the start of working hours.

Enter the employee No. (within 6 digits), “.”(decimal point),

and the job code (2 digits).

XXXXXX . YY

2-10-2-3. Clock-in operation (3)

Program: Display job code window = YES

Allow to clock-in with non-preset job-code = NO

(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)

Operation

1. XXXXXX <CLOCK-IN>

2. Choose the appropriate Job Code from the CLOCK-IN menu,

and press the <YES> key to register the start of working

hours.

→Job codes that are programmed in Employee file are displayed.

XXXXXX

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL 11:59 AM

Clock-in OK?

0.00

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

CLOCK-IN

1.Cashier

2.Cook

3.Dish Washer

4.Cleaning

0.00

Employee No. Job code

Employee No.

R-64

Application System

2-10-2-4. Clock-in operation (4)

Program: Display job code window = YES

Allow to clock-in with non-preset job code = YES

(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)

Operation

1. XXXXXX <CLOCK-IN>

2. Choose the appropriate Job Code from the CLOCK-IN menu,

and press the <YES> key to register the start of working

hours.

→All job codes that are programmed in job code file are displayed.

XXXXXX

Receipt sample

MC #01

—Header

REG

01 12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Harrison

—Employee character (16 digits)

CLOCK-IN 11:59 AM

—Special character (REC #29), time

JOB Dish Washier

—Special character (REC #33), job character

If you want to change these special characters, refer to the page 134 of the programming

manual.

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

CLOCK-IN

1.Cashier

2.Cook

3.Dish Washer

4.Cleaning

5.JOB A

6.JOB B

7.JOB C

8.JOB D

0.00

Employee No.

R-65

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-10-3. Clock-out operation

This function is used to register the ending work time.

2-10-3-1. Clock-out operation (1)

Operation

1. XXXXXX <CLOCK-OUT>.

2. When this message appears, press the <YES> key to register

the end of working hours.

2-10-3-2. Clock-out operation (2)

Program: Tip declaration compulsory (refer to the page 61 of the programming manual.)

Operation

1. XXXXXX <CLOCK-OUT>.

2. When this message appears, the employee should enter the

cash tip amount, if not, it is impossible to close the accounts

Receipt sample

MC #01

—Header

REG

01 12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Harrison

—Employee character (16 digits)

CLOCK-IN 11:59 AM

—Special character (REC #29), time

JOB Dish Washier

—Special character (REC #33), job character

CLOCK-OUT 01:59 PM

—Special character (REC #30), time

WORK TIME 02:45

—Special character (REC #34), working hours

BREAK TIME 00:45

—Special character (REC #35), recess

CASH TIP $12.34

—Special character (REC #36), cash tip amount

If you want to change these special characters, refer to the page 134 of the programming

manual.

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL 11:59 AM

Clock-out OK?

0.00

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

Enter cash tip amount and

press <YES> key.

0.00

R-66

Application System

2-10-3-3. Break-in operation

This function is used for the employees to register a recess.

Operation

1. XXXXXX <BREAK-IN>.

2. When this message appears, press the <YES> key to register

the start of a recess.

The receipt is not printed out, except electronic journal.

2-10-3-4. Break-out operation

This function is used for the employees to register the end of a recess.

Operation

1. XXXXXX <BREAK-OUT>.

2. When this message appears, press the <YES> key to register

the end of a recess.

The receipt is not printed out, except electronic journal.

2-10-3-5. Manager operation

When the manager operate CLOCK-IN after signing on, the manager can operate and

modify any employee’s record despite of corresponding employee number.

Following operations are possible to operate by the manager:

Specify the job code / CLOCK-IN / CLOCK-OUT / BREAK-IN / BREAK-OUT

Operating Flow

Manager sign on →CLOCK-IN/OUT operation, BREAK-IN/OUT operation →Sign off

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL 11:59 AM

Break-in OK?

0.00

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL 11:59 AM

Break-out OK?

0.00

R-67

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-68

Application System

2-11. Sign on control

This function is used to prohibit the sign-on operation by an employee who has not

CLOCK-IN. The following conditions should be fixed.

•Use only one terminal (master terminal) for the CLOCK-IN/OUT operation. This

terminal should be connected inline to the satellite terminals. But the time and

attendance work file (file 806) should be allocated to all terminals.

•The clerk file’s information should be common among all the terminals.

•Be sure there is a clerk who is specified as “Manager” in the clerk file. If no manager,

it may be locked to operate.

2-11-1. Sign on

1. When an employee normally operate CLOCK-IN/OUT, BREAK-IN/OUT, the

employee’s attendance information is sent from the main terminal to the satellite

terminals.

Flow of sign on

Sign on OK

CLOCK-IN

CLOCK-IN unfinished Unable to Sign on

(E175 Error message appears)

He/she is NOT in the

middle of BREAK-IN

He/she is in the

middle of BREAK-IN

Sign on OK

Unable to Sign on

(E175 Error message appears)

Sign on by

Manager

Sign on by

Clerk

CLK# information

CLK#1 information

CLK#2 information

CLK#3 information

•

CLK#99 information

R-69

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-11-2. Solution to abnormality of master terminal

When the satellite terminals cannot receive any information from the master terminal, the

master terminal shows the error message on the window and prints out the receipt with

terminal IDs that failed to communicate the data.

Receipt image

MC #01

—Header

REG

01 12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Communication Error

—Fixed message

MC #01 XXXX

—Machine ID, Error code

MC #03 XXXX

—Machine ID, Error code

•The error message and receipt will appear whenever the sign-on is failed. If you cannot

solve the inline data communication problem, program the system connection again,

and remove the uncommunicative terminal.

2-11-3. Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal

•When the satellite terminal cannot receive any information from the master terminal,

the default CLOCK-IN/OUT information remain.

In this case, only manager can sign on.

•When the satellite terminal could receive the CLOCK-IN/OUT information from the

master terminal only once, but failed to receive after then, the CLOCK-IN/OUT

information in each satellite terminal has left in the last received condition. In such case,

the last received information control employees’ sign on/off. (Manager can always sign

on.)

2-11-4. Sign on compulsory

When the satellite terminal cannot receive the information in spite of normal CLOCK-IN

operation on the master terminal, an employee may not sign on for some reason.

In such case, the manager needs the following operation.

1. Sign on by the manager (normal sign on operation.)

2. 99 xxxx <CLK#> (xxxx: the secret code of the corresponding employee, 4-digit.)

3. Sign off by the manager and the corresponding employee can sign on.

Note:

When the error message appeared under the employee’s CLOCK-IN operation, manager

should operate above steps.

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

Harrison

CLOCK-IN 11:59 AM

JOB Dish Washier

E177 Time&Attendance Data

Communication Error.

Please Call Manager.

0.00

Please sign on.

R-70

Application System

2-12. IDC (Item Data Capture)

This function is used for capturing all the registered item data by the REG / REF / REG–

modes. IDC file stores these captured items. If there is no record to capture item data, the

new data are not captured to the IDC file.

2-12-1. Available capturing items

Select the appropriate items that should be captured, and program these items into the IDC

link file. The available items and their contents are indicated below.

Items Contents File No.

PLU

Subdepartment

Department

Function

Pulldown group

Mix & match

Clerk

004

003

005

002

026

051

007

•The header of the transaction.

•The report of all the detailed statements.

•The header of the transaction.

•The report of the items/functions, or all the

detailed statements.

R-71

QT-6600 Reference Manual

IDC function file

●: Available items to be programmed as target for IDC.

: IDC target

–: Out of target

House Bon *1 114

Post entry 115

–

Round repeat 116

–

Open check 117

–

●Media change 118

Seat number 119

–

Display On/Off 120

–

Mode 124

–

●Eat-in 128

●Takeout 129

●Store 130

Recall 131

–

●Subdepartment 133

Subdepartment number

*6 134

–

Department number

*6 135

–

List *6 136

–

List number *6 137

–

NLU 138

–

Split payment 140

–

NFP 142

–

Customer No. *4 148

Payment *4 149

Swipe 172

–

Numerics (0 ~ 9) 201

–

Clear 202

–

Reverse display 206

–

Electronic journal display

207

–

Escape 211

–

Yes 212

–

No 213

–

Left arrow (←) 214

–

Right arrow (→) 215

–

Up arrow (↑) 216

–

Down arrow (↓) 217

–

Home 218

–

Display mode 219

–

Page down 220

–

Page up 221

–

●Cancel 236

Work time 237

–

Item search 248

–

Order character change

252

–

Function list 253

–

Location change 260

–

Table sharing 261

–

Function Code

Slip feed/Release 056

–

Tax status shift *1 057

Table number 058

–

Food stamp shift *1 059

Declaration 061

–

●Tax exempt 062

●Flat PLU 063

Menu shift 064

–

Shift PLU *1 065

Open 067

–

Open 2 068

–

First unit price *1 069

Second unit price *1 070

Clerk number *4 072

Operator read/reset

073

–

●Tray total *12 074

●Subtotal *7 075

Receipt On/Off 076

–

Taxable amount subtotal

077

–

Operator number 078

–

Merchandise subtotal

*7 080

Food stamp subtotal

081

–

Multiplication *1 082

Quantity/For *1 083

Square *1 084

Selective item subtotal

*2 085

Tare 087

–

Scale 088

–

Cube *1 090

New check 091

–

Old check 092

–

New/Old check 093

–

Add check *8 094

–

Separate check *8 095

–

Two zero (00) 096

–

Three zero (000) 097

–

Decimal point 098

–

Room number 100

Room message 101

–

OBR 103

–

Price change 104

–

Clock-in/out 108

–

Break-in/out 109

–

Coupon number 110

–

Substitution 111

–

Ketten Bon *1 113

Function Code

NOP 000 –

●

Cash amount tendered

001

●Charge 002

●Check 003

●Credit 004

●

Food stamp tender

005

●New balance *11 006

●EBT tender 007

Price inquiry 008

–

Stock inquiry 009

–

●Text recall *10 010

●Text print *10 011

Check print 012

–

Clerk transfer 013

–

●Table transfer *9 014

●Tip 015

Normal receipt 016

–

●Loan 019

●

Received on account

020

●Paid out 021

●Pick up 022

●Coupon 023

●Deposit 025

●Minus 027

●Discount 028

●Plus 029

●Premium 030

Refund *1 033

Error correct/Void

*3 034

Coupon 2 *1 036

Validation 037

–

Receipt 038

–

Check endorsement

039

–

●Non-add *10 040

●Non-add/No sale *10 041

●No sale 042

No. of customer 043

–

Arrangement *5 044

Currency exchange

*1 045

VAT 046

–

Bill 047

–

PLU *6 048

–

Price 049

–

●Department 051

Slip back feed/Release

054

–

Slip 055

–

R-72

Application System

*1 This function itself is not captured. But it is captured with the captured items or

functions.

*2 Selective item subtotal is captured with selective item discount or premium.

*3 1. Error correct is not captured.

This function itself is not captured. But it is captured with voided items.

3. Void reason is also captured.

*4 These functions (items) are captured in header record.

*5 This function itself is not captured. But the functions that are executed by this

function are captured.

*6 This function is not captured. But item itself might be an IDC target.

*7 When the option (printed when the key is pressed) is selected, it is captured.

*8 Transferred items by the add check and the separate check are not captured.

*9 ST transfer is not captured.

*10 This function is captured only in the sales registration.

*11 This function is captured only in the check tracking registration.

During clerk interrupt operation, this is not captured.

*12 Tray total is captured when it is pressed twice.

R-73

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-12-2. Set up the IDC start / end

Specify IDC Start or IDC End in manager mode. IDC does not start if you not allocate

necessary files for IDC.

•When IDC function is stopped, you can restart IDC by performing FC or INIT 2

(Refer to the page 11 of the programming manual.)

Operation

Note:

1. If you stop the IDC when the IDC file is full of items, you can stop the error sound

without clearing any registered data.

2. The necessary files for IDC

• File 036 (Registration buffer)

• File 063 (IDC buffer)

• File 057~ 059 (IDC file)

• File 804 (IDC link file)

Item Data Capture

Item Data Capture YES

0.00

R-74

Application System

2-12-3. How to memorize the captured items

Flow of the transferring data

1. Program: “Store data = Whole transaction for IDC (1)” and “Item only for IDC (2)”

(refer to the page 64 of the programming manual.)

Example

PLU 0001———> Memorized all the transaction into the IDC file (1)

PLU 0002———> Memorized into IDC file (2)

PLU 0003———> Memorized into IDC file (2)

Header

PLU 0001

Header

PLU 0002

Header

PLU 0003

Header

Total

PLU 0001

PLU 0002

PLU 0003

Total

IDC Buffer IDC file (1)

Header

PLU 0002

Header

PLU 0003

IDC file (2)

2. Program: “Store data = Item only” (refer to the page 74 of the programming manual.)

When an appropriate item is selected, this item and the header will be captured (see the

illustration below).

Example

PLU 0001———> Memorized into IDC file (1)

PLU 0002———> Memorized into IDC file (2)

PLU 0003———> Memorized into IDC file (2)

Header

PLU 0001

PLU 0002

PLU 0003

Total

IDC Buffer IDC file (1)

Header

PLU 0002

Header

PLU 0003

IDC file (2)

R-75

QT-6600 Reference Manual

File-# *1

Void reason

Unit price

Item status *4

Amount

Quantity

Descriptor

Dept link

Random

code

035 1113 15 20 25

Type *2

Mc ID

6030

Rec-# *1

Tax status *3

32 33

Group link

Shift price level

not used

2-12-4. IDC data file structure

Top record (Top record of each IDC file)

Header

0 6 12

Allocated record number Used record number

0811 13 16 19 21

Customer-#

Payment

Invoice-#

Consecutive

No.

Mc ID

Mode

Clerk-#

Check-#

Time

Number of

purchsed item

Not Used

31 36 41 48 5147 602

Net total

Subtotal

without tax

Subtotal

with tax

Date

Mode

D4: 01 = REG, 02 = REF, 03 = REG—

D3:

D2: 00 = Normal, 01 = Training

D1:

Clerk-#

D6: Clerk #; newly created this check

D5:

D4: Clerk #; last opened this check

D3:

D2: Clerk #; opening this check

D1:

Payment

D2: 00: Non-payment, 01: Payment

D1:

Item

Item (PLU / Subdepartment / Department)

Function

Cash, Charge, Check, Credit

Rec-# *1

CE key

Rec-#

03 119 16 21 26 31 4032

Type *2

Tendering

amount in

local

currency

Tendering

amount in

foreign

currency

Mc ID

Total Amount

Change

Amount

Room-#

Totaling Type

41 57

Room guest-#

Descriptor

Not Used

File-# *1

Totaling Type

0: Total operation, 1: Change operation, 2: Partial tender operation, 3: Single item w/o total line

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

Trailier (End record)

0571

records

No. of

Mc ID

not used

Not Used

602

Type *2

No. of records

used records for current registration without end record.

R-76

Application System

New balance fee

File-# *1

New balance

fee

Descriptor

05912 30 60

Type *2

Mc ID

Not Used

Rec-# *1

Cashing a check

File-# *1

059 16 26 31 41 5721 60

Type *2

Amount

tendered

Change

amount

Cashing

a check fee

Mc ID

Not Used

Descriptor

Rec-# *1

Text print, Text recall

035 50

File-# *1

Mc ID

Character

Not Used

Type *2

Rec-# *1

Table transfer

Mc ID

Not used

Deccriptor

Original

check-#

Rec-# *1

Type *2

New

check-#

05914 6013

File-# *1

20 26 422

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

File-# *1

Gross

quantity

05914 19 60

Type *2

Gross

amount

Descriptor

Mc ID

Not Used

Rec-# *1

New balance

Rec-# *1

03 9 14 19 24 29 30

Type *2

Tendering

amount

Food stamp

change amount

(only for FS/TD)

Mc ID

Food stamp

subtotal

amount

Cash change

Amount

Descriptor

Totaling Type

Not Used

File-# *1

Totaling Type

0: Total operation, 1: Change operation, 2: Partial tender operation, 3: Single item w/o total line

Food stamp tender, EBT tender

R-77

QT-6600 Reference Manual

+ / - / Coupon

Mc ID

Amount

Item status *4

Rec-# *1

Type *2

No.

Unit Price

Decsriptor

Not Used

35 1113 18 231 6028 449

File-# *1

Tax status *3

%+ / %-

Amount

Item status *4

Not Used

Rate

not used

Rate decimal position

13 18 23 28 33 34 35 51

Mc ID

Rec-# *1

Type *2

Not Used

Descriptor

25 111 609

File-# *1

Tax status *3

%+ / %- after selective item subtotal

Selective item

status-#

Not Used

Rate

Mc ID

Selective item

ST amount

Rec-# *1

Type *2

Not Used

Descriptor

Rate decimal position

25 11 18 23 281 609

FIile-# *1

Discount

amount

33 34 503

Selective item status-#

01: Selective item 1

02: Selective item 2

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

Tip

Mc ID

Not used

Amount

Descriptor

Rec-# *1

Type *2

05914 30 6013

File-# *1

05914 6013

Mc ID

Not used

Amount

Descriptor

Rec-# *1

Type *2

File-# *1

Received on account / Paid out / Deposit

Loan / Pickup

05914 6013

Mc ID

Not used

Amount

Descriptor

Rec-# *1

Type *2

File-# *1

R-78

Application System

Media change / Tray total

Store

Eat-in / Takeout

Not Used

Mc ID

Rec-# *1

Type *2

05 3014

Descriptor

9 6013

File-# *1

Not Used

Check-#

Rec-# *1

Type *2

File-# *1

Not Used

Mc ID

05914 6013

Subtotal

amount

20 26

Descriptor

422

Rec-# *1

Type *2

File-# *1

Amount

Not Used

Mc ID

05914

VAT exempt

amount

Descriptor

35 60132

ST / MDST

CE key

rec-#

Subtotal

amount

Printed

subtotal

amount

Subtotal

amount

after CE

Mc ID

Rec-# *1

Type *2

Descriptor

Not Used

51419 24 26 421 609

File-# *1

Tax exempt

Taxable

amount 4

Taxble

amount 1

Taxable

amount 2

Taxable

amount 3

Taxable

amount 5

Taxable

amount 6

TAxable

amount 7

VAT exempt

amount

Mc ID

Rec-# *1

Type *2

Not Used

35 11 16 21 26 311 60369

File-# *1

412

Tax status *3

46 51

Field name Taxable Taxable Taxable Taxable Taxable Taxable Taxable

Tax system amount 1 amount 2 amount 3 amount 4 amount 5 amount 6 amount 7

VAT TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4 TA5 TA6 TA7

U.S. TA1 TA2 TA3 -- -- -- --

Canada TA1 TA2 TA3 TA4 TA1 & 2 TA1 & 3 TA1 & 4

Singapore TA1 TA2 TA1 & 2 TA 3 TA1 & 3 TA2 & 3 TA1 & 2 & 3

# print (# or #/NS)

Number

Digit

Descriptor

Mc ID

Not used

Rec-# *1

Type *2

05914 6013

File-# *1

17 322

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

R-79

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Cancel

Rec-# *1

Type *2

File-# *1

Amount

Not Used

Mc ID

05914

Descriptor

30 50132

Loyalty discount

Selective item

status-#

Not Used

Record-#

Not Used

Rate

Mc ID

Amount

Rate decimal position

Type *2

Not Used

2916 21 26

Descriptor

481 6075

Discount

amount

31 323

Selective item status-#

00: ST %-

01: Selective item 1 %-

02: Selective item 2 %-

Scanning

Mix and match

Scan mix and match

No sale (NS or #/NS)

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

File-# *1

Unit price

Item status *4

Amount

Quantity

Not used

035 15 1917 24

Type *2

Mc ID

Rec-# *1

OBR code

Tax status *3

Shift price level

Descriptor

File-# *1

Target

rec-#

Target

file-#

not used

Amount

No.

Descriptor

035 1113 18 23

Type *2

Mc ID

6025

Rec-# *1

Tax status *3

not used

File-# *1

rec-#

MM type

MM discount

Amount

No.

Descriptor

035 10 11 16 21

Type *2

Mc ID

6023

not used

Tax status *3

2925

not used

MM type: Minus = 00, %- = 01, Free = 20 MM discount: Cyclic = 00, Only once = 01, Contunious = 02

Descriptor

Mc ID

Not used

Rec-# *1

Type *2

059 6013

File-# *1

252

R-80

Application System

*1 File-#, Rec-#:

These are stored in Hexa-decimal. If the data is “ABCD”, it means “CDAB”.

*2 Type:

It means record type, refer to 2-12-5 IDC data type section of this manual.

*3 Tax status:

• Single tax/VAT

b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: T/S4, b5: T/S5, b6: T/S6, b7: T/S7, b8: T/S8, b9: T/S9, b10: T/S10

• U.S. or Singapore

b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: F/S

• Canada

b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: T/S4, b9: Donuts tax, b10: always “1”

*4 Item status:

b6~: not used, b5: 2nd@registration, b4: house Bon registration,

b3: <COUPON2> registration, b2: <REFUND> registration, b1: <VOID> registration

R-81

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Type of data Type Capture item

DTLTYPE_SCAN 05 Scan item

DTLTYPE_SDEPT 0A Main item : Subdepartment

DTLTYPE_DEPT 0F Main item : Department

DTLTYPE_PLU 14 Main item : PLU

DTLTYPE_SET_FIX 19 Dependent item : Set-menu/child (fixed)

DTLTYPE_SET_SEL 1E Dependent item : Set-menu/child (option)

DTLTYPE_COND 23 Dependent item : Condiment *

DTLTYPE_PREP 28 Dependent item : Preparation

DTLTYPE_ITEM_PLUS 3C Dependent item (discount) : item +

DTLTYPE_ITEM_MINUS 3D Dependent item (discount) : item -

DTLTYPE_ITEM_CPN 3E Dependent item (discount) : item CPN

DTLTYPE_ITEM_P_PLUS 3F Dependent item (discount) : item %+

DTLTYPE_ITEM_P_MINUS 40 Dependent item (discount) : item %-

DTLTYPE_CASH 47 Finalize : Cash

DTLTYPE_CHARGE 48 Finalize : Charge

DTLTYPE_CHECK 49 Finalize : Check

DTLTYPE_CREDIT 4A Finalize : Credit

DTLTYPE_FSTD 4B Finalize : FSTD / EBTTD

DTLTYPE_NBCHKTRC 50 NB (check tracking) operation

DTLTYPE_CANCEL 55 Cancel

DTLTYPE_TBLTR 56 Table transfer

DTLTYPE_NBFEE 57 NB fee

DTLTYPE_STORE 58 Store

DTLTYPE_ST_PLUS 64 ST +

DTLTYPE_ST_MINUS 65 ST -

DTLTYPE_ST_CPN 66 ST CPN

DTLTYPE_ST_P_PLUS 67 ST %+

DTLTYPE_ST_P_MINUS 68 ST %-

DTLTYPE_SIST_PERCENT_PLUS 69 SIST %+

DTLTYPE_SIST_PERCENT_MINUS 6A SIST %-

DTLTYPE_ST 6F ST

DTLTYPE_MDST 70 MDST

DTLTYPE_PRT_CHAR 71 PRINT CHAR

DTLTYPE_SHARP 73 # Print

DTLTYPE_TIP 74 Tip

DTLTYPE_DEPO 75 Deposit

DTLTYPE_TXEX 76 Tax exempt

DTLTYPE_EATIN 77 Eat-in

DTLTYPE_TAKEOUT 78 Takeout

DTLTYPE_TRAYTTL 79 Tray total

DTLTYPE_RC 96 RC

DTLTYPE_PD 97 PD

DTLTYPE_MEDIA_CHG 98 Medial change

DTLTYPE_GET_MONEY 99 Media change (get)

DTLTYPE_PUT_MONEY 9A Media change (put)

DTLTYPE_LOAN 9B Loan

DTLTYPE_PICKUP 9C Pick up

DTLTYPE_FIN_LOANPICKUP 9D Finalize loan/pick up

DTLTYPE_AMOUNT_EXCHANGE 9E Currency exchange

DTLTYPE_CASH_IN_CHECK 9F Cashing a check

DTLTYPE_MIX&MATCH A0 Mix & match

DTLTYPE_SCAN_MM A3 Scan mix & match

DTLTYPE_NOSALE B4 No sales

DTLTYPE_END FF End IDC Record

* Includes the item registered as a child PLU

2-12-5. IDC data type

R-82

Application System

2-12-6. Transferring IDC

It is possible to do collection of IDC files through inline system. Refer to the terminal

structure as below.

Flow of the transferring IDC

1. PC sends Z-lock command by using job command to collection master.

PC enables to check the Z-lock confirmation.

2. PC sends the consolidation command by using Job command to collect IDC files from

all satellite terminals.

3. Collection master receives the IDC data from each satellite in order.

PC enables to check whether the collection master has finished the job.

4. PC sends the Z-command or X-command to the collection master.

5. PC receives the collection data from consolidation file. If the Z-command has issued

at step 4, consolidation file in the collection master are all reset.

Data transferring flow

IDC data in each terminal totalizer is appended to the consolidation file individually.

Notes:

•Just after IDC starts, the consolidation file in the collectionmaster is cleared to receive

new data.

•Just after the receiving is over, the data is remained in the consolidation file. To clear

this data, send the Z-command or the file-clear command to the collection master from

the PC. (Set “No”, to “Reset consolidation total after inline consolidation” in the

programming the communication in the machine feature programming.

•In case of collection Z, all of the IDC files in the satellite terminals are cleared.

Collection Master Satellite Satellite Satellite Satellite

Via COM 1 port of the master terminal (direct/Modem)

Master file

Satellite (1) file

Satellite (2) file

Data from Master Totalizer

Data from Satellite (1)

Data from Satelite (2)

•

Copy

Append

Consolidation file (in Collection Master)

R-83

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-13. Electronic journal

There are two types of electronic journal. One is “normal” electronic journal, the other is

“intelligent” electronic journal. The “normal” electronic journal stores all operations such

as registration, report issuing and programming, but the “intelligent” electronic journal

stores only registration. And the “intelligent” electronic journal stores one receipt when the

transaction is finalized (not stored at new balance). You can use the “normal” and the

“intelligent” electronic journal at the same time.

Electronic journal is stored in the terminal memory, so it is possible to print journal

(electronic journal report) by date or by consecutive number.

And since the journal data is stored in the memory, you can collect journal data from all

terminals in the system. Also, you can issue receipt and guest receipt from electronic

journal.

2-13-1. Storing electronic journal

The normal electronic journal starts automatically and it ends if the journal memory

becomes full. When the memory becomes full, the terminal alerts end error which you can

select to alert or not to alert by programming. Refer to the page 42 of the programming

manual.

The intelligent electronic journal starts automatically and it returns to the top of the

memory if the journal memory becomes full.

Notes:

Even if the electronic journal memory is full, registrations are not disturbed.

2-13-2. Issuing electronic journal report

You can issue both type of the electronic journal read or reset report by date or by

consecutive number.

Refer to the page 156 of this manual.

2-13-3. Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after sales

Pressing the <EJ DISP> key shows the most recent transactions. You can go to older

transactions by pressing the <PAGE UP> key while newer transactions by the <PAGE

DOWN> key. And also you can move lines in a transaction by the <↑> or <↓> key.

During displaying an transaction, you can issue the post receipt of this transaction by

pressing the <RECEIPT> key. If the guest receipt in the original transaction was issued

you can get the copy of the guest receipt by pressing the <RECEIPT> key.

R-84

Application System

2-13-4. Transferring electronic journal memory

It is possible to do collection of electronic journal files through inline system.

Refer to the terminal structure illustrated below.

Flow of the transferring electronic journal

1. PC sends the collection command by using Job command to collect electronic journal

file from a satellite terminal.

2. Collection master receives the electronic journal data from a satellite.

PC enables to check whether the collection master has finished the job.

3. PC sends the data send command to the collection master for the collected electronic

journal data.

4. PC receives the collection data from the master.

5. Repeat step 1 ~ 4 for all satellites.

Data transferring flow

Electronic journal data in each terminal is collected file individually.

Satellite (1) file

Satellite (2) file

•

Copy

Copy Consolidation file

(in Collection

Master)

Satellite (1)

Satellite (2)

File 048 and 648 for “normal” electronic journal.

File 050 and 650 for “intelligent” electrionic journal.

Collection Master Satellite Satellite Satellite Satellite

Via COM 1 port of the master terminal (direct/Modem)

R-85

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-14. Simple time and attendance

This function allows shop owners to control his / her employees’ working time and clock-

out reason.

– Simple time & attendance file

This file is used to log the clock-in time, clock-out time and clock-out reason.

– Clock-out reasen file

In this file, clock-out reasons stored in this file. You can choose the clock-out reason

everytime when you clock-out. The clock-out reason is logged in the simple time &

attendance file.

Flow of Simple Time & Attendance operation

The following flow shows the order of simple time & attendance function by pressing the

specified keys: It is possible to specify one <WORKTIME> key as both clock-in and

clock-out function, or specify two keys separately. ( Refer to “4-3-7-33 Worksheet for

clock-in/clock-out” in the programming manual for details.)

CLOCK-IN →CLOCK-OUT

2-14-1. Clock-in operation

This function is used to register the Starting work time.

Operation

1. <WORKTIME> XXXXXX (C/D) <WORKTIME>

XXXXXX: Employee’s number

C/D: Check digit for employee number

(modulas 10, weight 13)

Receipt sample

MC #01

—Header

REG

12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Simple Time/Atten Records

—Title

EMPLOYEE No. 001234

—Employee number

SIGN ON

—Clock-in sign

12-31-2005 11:59

—Clock-in time

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

PERSONALNO.: ---*****

R-86

Application System

2-14-2. Clock-out operation

This function is used to register the Ending work time.

Operation

1. <WORKTIME> XXXXXX (C/D) <WORKTIME>

XXXXXX: Employee’s number

C/D: Check digit for employee number

2. Select clock-out reasen.

Receipt sample

MC #01

—Header

REG

12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Simple Time/Atten Records

—Title

EMPLOYEE No. 001234

—Employee number

SIGN OFF

—Clock-in sign

12-31-2005 11:59

—Clock-in time

2-14-3. Worktime display

This function shows the employee’s worktime.

Operation

1. XXXXXX (C/D) <WORKTIME>

XXXXXX: Employee’s number

C/D: Check digit for employee number

2-14-4. Report

Clock-in/ clock-out time and clock-out reason are printed on the simple time and attendance report.

Refer to the Read/ Reset chapter.

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

PERSONALNO.: ---*****

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

Sign off Reasons

1.END OF SHIFT

2.UNWELL

3.FAMILY EMERGENCY

4.OTHER

0.00

REG 10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

SIMPLE TIME IN ACCOUNT

TODAY : 4:58

TOTAL : 16:07

STATUS : SIGNED OFF

0.00

R-87

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2-15. Magnetic card reading

QT-6600 has the following capability by swiping magnetic card.

1. Customer number entry *1

You can enter customer number, by swiping magnetic card.

<CUST-#> key →Card swipe

•Customer number should be programmed in the customer file.

•Site No. in the mag stripe equals to the programmed value.

•Use Track-1

2. Create dummy check *1

Card swiping activates table transfer.

•Read the customer name from the magnetic card and store it to the check index memory.

•In case of using this feature, program “transfer table by card swiping” (D10 of the

address 26 of the general control program)

•Use Track-1

3. Clerk sign on *1

Card swiping activates clerk sign on. (effective during signing off only)

•In case of using this feature, the lower 4 digit in the mag stripe should be set to the clerk

number.

•Use Track-2 (If track-2 cannot read, use track-1.)

4. Enter REG 2 mode *1

Cashier/ clerk can enter the REG 2 mode, by swiping card.

<MODE> key →<2> <REG MODE> key →Card swipe

•In case of using this feature, the lower 4 digit in the mag stripe is treated as manager’s

secret number.

•Use Track-2 (If track-2 cannot read, use track-1.)

5. Loyalty card

This function is used to register the key strings such as customer discount etc., by swiping

magnetic card (and scanning OBR code). After swiping a card (track-2)/ scanning a code, the

designated function in the transaction key file is executed.

Procedure

• Using swiping:

<SWIPE> key →Card swipe *1 *2

<SWIPE> key should be allocated in the transaction key file.

If there is no <SWIPE> key on the keyboard, program D7 and D6

of the address 24 of the genreral control program to designate the

default <SWIPE> key.

Card swipe *2

• Using scanning:

<SWIPE> key →Code scanning *1*2 Pressing <SWIPE> key is mandatory.

After swiping/ scanning card, the following subjects are performed.

1. Check card expiry (In case of programming check to <SWIPE> key.)

2. Card data check (Checked by D10 ~ D8 of <SWIPE> key program and unit price field of

<SWIPE> key.

3. Transfer card data (D7 and D6 of <SWIPE> key program)

4. Activate function (D5 ~ D1 of <SWIPE> key program)

*1 In case of setting “Swipe has NOT precedence.” (D1 of the address 24 of the general control program)

*2 In case of setting “Swipe has precedence.” (D1 of the address 24 of the general control program)

R-88

Application System

Magenetic card specification

Track-1, Format B:

Start sentinel - one character (generally ‘%’)

Format code = “B” - one character (alpha only)

Primary account number (PAN) - up to 19 characters

Usually, but not always, matches the credit card number

printed on the front of the card.

Field separator - one character (generally ‘^’)

Name - two to 26 characters

Field separator - one character (generally ‘^’)

Expiration date - four characters in the form MMYY

Service code - three characters

Discretinary data - may include Pin Verification Key Indicator (PVKI, one character),

Pin Verification Value (PVV, 4 characters)

Card Verification Value or Card Verification Code (CVV or CVK, 3

characters)

End sentinel - one character (generally ‘?’)

Longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) - one character

Track-2:

Start sentinel - one character (generally ‘:’)

Track number - 1, 2, 3

Primary Account Number (PAN) - up to 19 characters

Usually, but not always, matches the credit card number

printed on the front of the card

Separator - one character (generally ‘=’)

Expiration date - four characters in the form MMYY

Service code - three characters

Discretionary data - as in track one

End sentinel - one character (generally ‘?’)

LRC - one character

R-87

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3. Manager operation ................................................................................. R-88

3-1. Machine initialization ............................................................................. R-88

3-1-1. INIT ............................................................................................................... R-88

3-1-2. Flag clear ...................................................................................................... R-88

3-1-3. INIT 2 ............................................................................................................ R-89

3-1-4. INIT code ...................................................................................................... R-89

3-2. IPL (Initial Program Loading) ................................................................ R-89

3-2-1. IPL................................................................................................................. R-89

IPL via CF card .......................................................................................................... R-89

3-2-2. System configuration before IPL operation ................................................... R-90

IPL via LAN port......................................................................................................... R-90

3-3. Manager function ................................................................................... R-91

3-3-1. System connection check ............................................................................. R-92

3-3-2. Remote on .................................................................................................... R-93

3-3-3. Remote off .................................................................................................... R-93

3-3-4. Busy reset ..................................................................................................... R-94

3-3-5. Stock maintenance ....................................................................................... R-95

3-3-6. Drawer for clerk ............................................................................................. R-96

3-3-7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt) .................................................................................. R-96

3-3-8. Order ID change ........................................................................................... R-97

3-3-9. Error log print ................................................................................................ R-98

3-3-10. System re-configuration ................................................................................ R-99

3-3-11. Item Data Capture....................................................................................... R-100

3-3-12. Euro change over........................................................................................ R-101

3-3-13. Clerk window............................................................................................... R-102

3-3-14. Customer .................................................................................................... R-103

3-3-15. Customer busy reset ................................................................................... R-104

3-3-16. Sound.......................................................................................................... R-104

3-3-17. Print batch maintenance file ....................................................................... R-105

3-3-18. Execute batch maintenance file .................................................................. R-106

3-3-19. Re-index the scanning PLU file ................................................................... R-107

3-3-21. FTP client .................................................................................................... R-108

3-3-20. Licence code entry...................................................................................... R-108

3-3-22. Maintenance data ....................................................................................... R-109

3-3-23. Printer logo send ......................................................................................... R-110

3-3-24. Clerk number .............................................................................................. R-111

3-3-25. Operation monitor ....................................................................................... R-111

3-4. System command execution............................................................... R-112

3-4-1. X/Z reporting ............................................................................................... R-112

3-4-2. X/Z collection / consolidation ...................................................................... R-114

3-4-3. Remote power control ................................................................................. R-114

3-5. Data communication system .............................................................. R-115

3-5-1. Inline / online connectors ............................................................................ R-115

3-5-2. Hardware interface ...................................................................................... R-116

3-5-3. Inline / online functions ............................................................................... R-118

3-6. Collection / Consolidation system ..................................................... R-119

3-6-1. X/Z collection .............................................................................................. R-121

3-6-2. X/Z consolidation ........................................................................................ R-123

3-6-3. X/Z collection / consolidation ...................................................................... R-126

3-7. Auto-programming function ............................................................... R-129

3-7-1. Auto-programming functions ....................................................................... R-129

3-7-2. Auto-program operation and CF card utilities ............................................. R-130

R-88

Manager Operation

3. Manager operation

This section describes manager operations (such as machine initialization, IPL, manager

functions etc.) of QT-6600.

3-1. Machine initialization

There are three different types of initialization such as INIT, FC, and INIT2.

INIT; Machine initialization, all program and total data are reset.

FC; Flag clear, all program and total data are remained, only the current transaction data

are reset.

INIT2; Machine initialization 2, all program data are remained, only total data are reset.

The procedures of machine initialization are described in the chapter 1 of the programming

manual. The required init code are listed below.

3-1-2. Flag clear

Flag clear process is as follows:

3-1-1. INIT

Initialization process is as follows:

Start

End

Hardware reset

All RAM reset

Inline ID definition

File creation 1 File creation 2

Initialization result

to E-journal

Revise terminal

connection table

Input Init code

(see above)

Initialization operation

Input date/time, ID etc.

Receiving program

rom other terminal or

CF card

Start Hardware reset

Initialize work area/

buffers/flags

Initialization result

to E-journal End

Menu selection

FC/Init2

Init 2

Operation Init code Meaning

00020000 for the U.S.

00010000 for other area (default descriptors are initialized in English)

Init 00040000 for other area (default descriptors are initialized in German)

00050000 for other area (default descriptors are initialized in French)

00060000 for other area (default descriptors are initialized in Spanish)

00080000 Arabic (default descriptors are initialized in English)

Flag clear No need

Init2 8888888888

* See the “INIT code” section to notice the detail information.

R-89

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-1-3. INIT 2

Initialization 2 process is as follows:

Start

Hardware reset

Initialize work area/

buffers/flags

All totoalizer reset

including E-journal

End

Menu selection

FC/Init2

Flag clear

Description Choice Program code

Set the default condition of receipt on/ off.

Area code:

U.S. : 2

Other area (default descriptor in English) : 1

(default descriptor in German) : 4

(default descriptor in French) : 5

(default descriptor in Spanish) : 6

(using Arabic character table) : 8

Always “0”

COM3

Use remote printer-2 : 0

Use remote display : 3

Always “0”

;

Set off = 0

Set on = 1

Significant

number

Significant

number

3-2. IPL (Initial Program Loading)

IPL should be made before initializing when the application software has been modified.

3-2-1. IPL

IPL via CF card

Start

Continue

to INIT

ROM check

Store the receiving

data to Flash

3-1-4. INIT code

R-90

Manager Operation

IPL via LAN port

CF card

IPL source IPL target

IPL Data

CF card slot is located

on the leftside of the terminal.

IPL source

LAN port

defined as FTP server

IPL target

IPL Data

3-2-2. System configuration before IPL operation

Insert the IPL CF card to the terminal or connect PC and target terminal.

Start

END

Restore

all data

IPL from

CF card

Store IPL data

to CF card Backup all data

to CF card

Clear IPL data

in the CF card

Insert CF card

(more than128MB vacant)

R-91

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3. Manager function

Using the manager function makes it possible to control the terminal conditions. The

contents of the manager function are as follows:

1. System connection check

2. Remote on

3. Remote off

4. Busy reset

5. Stock maintenance

6. Drawer for clerk

7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt)

8. Order ID change

9. Error log print

10. System re-configuration

11. Item Data Capture

12. EURO Change over.

13. Clerk window

14. Customer

15. Customer Busy Reset

16. Recording

17. Print batch maintenance file

18. Execute batch maintenance

19. Re-index scanning PLU file

20. Licence code entry

21. FTP client

22. Maintenance data

23. Printer logo send

24. Clerk number

25. Operation monitor

R-92

Manager Operation

MGR C01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

3-3-1. System connection check

This command shows the connection status of terminals, and printers.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “1. System Connection Check” and press the <YES>

key.

4. After checking the system connection, press the <ESC> key

to return the previous menu.

Note:

If there is unrecognized terminal there it shows “*” as below.

example) #04 ************

System Connection Check

INLINE 10/100Mbps

#01 MC#01

RS-232C Printer 1 2 4

#02 MC#02

RS-232C Printer 1

#03 MC#03

RS-232C Printer *

01 LAN Printer 192168000060

02 ************ 192168000061

0.00

Physical ID, Logical ID

RS-232C printer recognition (1: printer (1), 2: printer (2), 4: slip printer

Un recognized RS-232C printer

LAN printer ID, IP address

Unrecognized LAN printer

R-93

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-2. Remote on

This command is used to power on the terminals connected with the same inline.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “2. Remote On” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select all terminals or individual terminal, select “YES” to

execute this command.

3-3-3. Remote off

This command is used to power off the terminals connected with the same inline.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “3. Remote Off” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select all terminals or individual terminal, select “YES” to

execute this command.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

Remote On

Terminal All

OK? YES

0.00

Remote Off

Terminal All

OK? YES

0.00

R-94

Manager Operation

3-3-4. Busy reset

This command is used to release the busy flag of the check used by other dead terminal.

Executing this command always releases this flag, so please be careful to perform this

operation.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “4. Busy Reset” and press the <YES> key.

4. Enter the appropriate check number, and then select “YES”

to execute this command.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

Busy Reset

Check No. 12

OK? YES

0.00

Busy Reset

Check No. 12

OK? YES

Normal End

0.00

R-95

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-5. Stock maintenance

This command is used to update PLU, scanning PLU, department stock quantities brought

by purchasing or inventory processing.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “5. Stock Maintenance” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select “PLU/ Scan PLU/ Department” and press the <YES>

key.

5. Select the appropriate PLU and press the <YES> key.

6. Enter adjustment (adding) stock value and press the <YES>

key. If you want to decrease stock value, press the <RF> key

before entering the stock value.

The next PLU appears on the screen.

7. Press the <ESC> key to terminate this sequence.

8. Press the <ESC> key to issue receipt.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

No. Descriptor Stock

1 PLU0001 0.000

0.000

0.00

No. Descriptor Stock

1 PLU0001 +100.000

100.000

2 PLU0002 0.000

0.000

PLU0001 +100.000

Stock Maintenance

PLU

1.PLU0001

2.PLU0002

3.PLU0003

4.PLU0004

5.PLU0005

6.PLU0006

7.PLU0007

8.PLU0008 ↓

0.00

Entered stock quantity

Total stock quantity

Stock Maintenance

No. Descriptor Stock

----------------------------------------

1 PLU0001 +100.000

100.000

2 PLU0002 0.000

0.000

RECEIPT

Manager Mode

Stock Maintenance

1.PLU Stock

2.Scan PLU

3.Department

0.00

R-96

Manager Operation

3-3-6. Drawer for clerk

This command is used to designate the drawer 1 ~ 2.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “6. Drawer for Clerk” and press the <YES> key.

The display shows “Clerk name/Drawer No.” list.

4. Select the drawer No. field of the appropriate clerk, enter the

drawer number (1 or 2, “0” means drawer 1), and press the

<YES> key.

5. Press the <ESC> key to return to the previous menu.

3-3-7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt)

This command is used to designate the check number for clerk interrupt to each clerk.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “7. CHK# (CLK Interrupt)” and press the <YES> key.

The display shows “Clerk name / Check No.” list.

4. Select the check No. field of the appropriate clerk, enter the

check number (within 6-digits), and press the <YES> key.

5. Press the <ESC> key to return the previous menu.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

Drawer for Clerk

01 0

02 0

03 0

04 0

05 0

06 0

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

01 011111

02 022222

03 033333

04 044444

05 055555

06 066666

0.00

R-97

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-8. Order ID change

This command is used to change the target printer of order temporarily.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “8. Order ID Change” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select “YES” of the Definition Enable field, and enter an

appropriate ID number of each order printer and press the

<YES> key. Select “YES” of the last line to execute this

command.

Note: D4 D3 D2 D1

In case of RS-232C printer,

D4D3: Terminal ID number which connects with the printer.

D2D1: 01 = Printer 1, 02 = Printer 2, 03 = Printer 3

In case of LAN printer,

D4D3: Terminal ID number which sends data to the printer.

D2D1: 11 ~ 26 = Printer 1 ~ 16

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

1.System Connection Check

2.Remote On

3.Remote Off

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change ↓

0.00

Order ID Change

Definition Enable YES

1.Order1 0103

2.Order2 0202

3.Order3 0203

4.Order4 0104

15.Order15 0000

16.Order16 0000

OK? YES

0.00

R-98

Manager Operation

3-3-9. Error log print

This command is used to display / print out the error log file.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “9. Error Log Print” and press the <YES> key.

4. The display shows current error log.

Then press the <ESC> key.

5. Press the <YES> key if you want to print error log.

If you do not want to print error log, press the <ESC> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

3.Remote off ↑

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change

9.Error Log Print

10.System Re-configuration ↓

0.00

ID Date Time OPE ERR JOB

#01 MC #01 0603 1535 1 51 38

#03 MC #03 0603 1535 22 235 22

0.00

Error Log Print

Do you want to printout? YES

0.00

Error Log Print

ID Date Time OPE ERR JOB

----------------------------------------

#01 MC #01 0603 1535 1 51 38

#03 MC #03 0603 1535 22 235 22

#00 0000 0000 0 0 0

RECEIPT

R-99

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-10. System re-configuration

This command is one procedure of down recovery. It backs the contents of the system

connection table to the original value.

It should be executed under these conditions:

1) After issuing “Open check report”.

2) All terminals are connected and work without any trouble. (Check by system connection

check)

3) No terminal is in registration, collection, consolidation, sending/receiving programs.

4) Activate “System re-configuration” command at the terminal on which the “Cut-off”

icon is lit.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “10. System Re-configuration” and press the <YES>

key.

4. Choose the option “YES (Perform system re-configuration)

/ NO (Abort this procedure)” and press the <YES> key.

* Perform “System Recofiguration” operation at the terminal that

shows system error icon ¶.

System Re-configuration

System Re-configuration NO

OK? YES

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

3.Remote off ↑

4.Busy Reset

5.Stock Maintenance

6.Drawer for Clerk

7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)

8.Order ID Change

9.Error Log Print

10.System Re-configuration ↓

0.00

Cut-off Master or Backup master icon

R-100

Manager Operation

3-3-11. Item Data Capture

You can change the IDC status (capture transaction data or not) by the operation described

below.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “11. Item Data Capture” and press the <YES> key.

4. Choose the option “YES (capture item data) / NO (not capture

item data)” and press the <ESC> key.

Item Data Capture

Item Data Capture YES

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording ↓

0.00

R-101

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-12. Euro change over

After this operation, the following subjects are made:

(1) The Euro is defined as main currency and the local is defined as sub currency.

(2) All totals and counts are reset.

(3) Unit prices (department, subdepartment, PLU, 2nd @, shift PLU) are converted

in Euro.

Before “change over operation”,

(1) Issue all reset report including open check report, if necessary.

(2) Sign off all cashier/clerk and stop all operations of all terminals of the system.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “12. EURO Change over” and press the <YES> key.

4. If you want to proceed this step, press the <YES> key. To

abort this step, press the <NO> or <ESC> key.

5. If you want to proceed this step, enter “8888888888” and

press the <YES> key. (It takes a few minutes.)

To abort this step, press the <NO> or <ESC> key.

Perform the same operation of all the terminals of the system.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording ↓

0.00

EURO Change over

Operation Code ?

0.00

EURO Change over

Done update EURO rate and

symbols.

Please check unit price and

fix totalizer euro-in-drawer

title character.

RECEIPT

EURO Change over

This operation will clear all

of totalizer and change over

EURO/LOCAL system.

Are you sure want to execute

these job? YES

0.00

R-102

Manager Operation

3-3-13. Clerk window

You can program clerk window contents in the MGR mode.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “13.Clerk Window” and press the <YES> key.

4. Press the <YES> key to continue.

5. Select the clerk window. If you don’t use clerk window,

select “1.(Disable)”.

6. Select the clerk to allocate the clerk window. After this

operation, select the appropriate key in the clerk window.

7. Press the <YES> key to set this program.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording ↓

0.00

Clerk Window

Clerk Window (Disable)

0.00

Clerk Window 1

Use this MENU Sign on

OK? YES

0.00

Clerk Window

1.(Disable)

2.Clerk window 1

3.Clerk window 2

4.Clerk window 3

5.Clerk window 4

6.Clerk window 5

7.Clerk window 6

8.Clerk window 7 ↓

0.00

Clerk Window 1

Clerk window 1

1.(CLERK RESET)

07 ↓

0.00

R-103

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-14. Customer

You can program (add / modify / delete) the customer (name, address etc.) in the MGR

mode.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “14.Customer” and press the <YES> key.

4. Add customer: Select (New customer) and press the <YES>.

Then (input the customer No. and) press the <YES> in the

next screen.

Modify customer: Select the appropriate customer and press

the <YES>.

Delete customer: Select the appropriate customer and press

the <NO>.

•If you swipe a card at this timing, “add customer (new card)”

or “modify customer (already programmed card) is per-

formed.

—— Customer name (up to 24 characters)

—— Customer title (select from sub menu)

—— Customer address 1 (up to 24 characters)

—— Customer address 2 (up to 24 characters)

—— Customer address 3 (up to 24 characters)

—— Customer address 4 (up to 24 characters)

—— Customer phone No. (up to 12 digits)

—— Customer group (select from sub menu)

5. Press the <ESC> to set and continue to program other

customer.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording ↓

0.00

Cust No. Name

0 (New customer)

11111 Mr. John SMITH

22222 Mrs. Jane Parker

33333 Ms. Janet Lynn

0.00

Cust No. 123456

Name

Title

Address(1)

Address(2)

Address(3)

Address(4)

Phone No.

Customer GP Group01

New customer YES

0.00

R-104

Manager Operation

3-3-15. Customer busy reset

This command is used to release the busy flag of the customer used by other dead terminal.

Executing this command always releases this flag, so please be careful to perform this

operation.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “15. Customer Busy Reset” and press the <YES> key.

4. Enter the appropriate customer number, and then select

“YES” to execute this command.

Customer Busy Reset

Cust No.

OK? YES

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

0.00

Busy Reset

CUST No.

123456

Dr.

Big Scientist

BALANCE

$45.90

DISCOUNT $3.23

RECEIPT

3-3-16. Sound

This command is used to play the programmed sound file or to record to the sound file.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “16. Recording” and press the <YES> key.

4. Enter the appropriate sound file, press <YES> to play, press

<NO> to record.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

9.Error Log Print ↑

10.System Re-configuration

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording ↓

0.00

Recording

WAV File

1.Sound (1)

2.Sound (2)

3.Sound (3)

4.Sound (4)

5.Sound (5)

6.Sound (6)

7.Sound (7)

8.Sound (8) ↓

0.00

R-105

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-17. Print batch maintenance file

This command is used to print batch maintenance file.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “17. Print Batch Mainte” and press the <YES> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

10.System Re-configuration ↑

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte ↓

0.00

RECEIPT

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

10.System Re-configuration ↑

11.Item Data Capture

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte ↓

0.00

Print Batvh Maint File

Print Batch Maint File

Delete/Change Change

#4917770088>>>>>

Scan PLU0001 $12.34

Group Link --------

Dept Link DEPT01

Sub-Dept Link --------

Taxable status Non Tax

Scan Mix&Match --------

Negative Price NO

Zero Unit Price NO

Open PLU NO

Item Follows Department NO

Compulsory Multiply NO

Not Allowed Multiplication NO

491077008

R-106

Manager Operation

3-3-18. Execute batch maintenance file

This command is used to execute batch maintenance file.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “18. Execute Batch Mainte” and press the <YES> key.

4. Press the <YES> key if Scan item Z report has already issued.

5. Select “YES” and press the <YES> key.

6. Display “Batch Maintenance Finished” and return the root

screen automatically.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

11.Item Data Capture ↑

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.Execute Batch Maint ↓

0.00

RECEIPT

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

11.Item Data Capture ↑

12.EURO Change over

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.Execute Batch Maint ↓

0.00

Z-report for Scan item done ?

Execute Batch Maintenance

Execute Batch Maintenance NO

OK? YES

0.00

Execute Batch Maintenance

Execute Batch Maintenance YES

OK? YES

0.00

Batch Maintenance Finish !

Scan PLU001 NG

Scan PLU023 NG

(Normal end)

(Error end)

Print error item.

Batch Maintenance Finish !

R-107

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-19. Re-index the scanning PLU file

This command is used to re-index the scanning PLU file.

After this command, send the scanning PLU file to all terminals of the cluster.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “19. Re-index Scan File” and press the <YES> key.

4. Press the <YES> key if Scan item Z report has already issued.

5. Select “YES” and press the <YES> key.

6. Display “Re-index Scan File” and return the root screen

automatically.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

12.EURO Change over ↑

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file ↓

0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

12.EURO Change over ↑

13.Clerk Window

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file ↓

0.00

Z-report for Scan item done ?

Re-Index Scan File

Re-index Scan File NO

OK? YES

0.00

Re-Index Scan File

Re-index Scan File YES

OK? YES

0.00

Re-index Scan File !

R-108

Manager Operation

3-3-20. Licence code entry

This command is used to enter the software licence code.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “20. Licence code entry” and press the <YES> key.

4. Enter the licence code and press the <YES> key and select

“YES” and press the <YES> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

13.Clerk Window ↑

14.Customer

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file

20.Licence Code Entry ↓

0.00

Licence Code Entry

OK? YES

0.00

3-3-21. FTP client

You can execute FTP client processing by the operation below.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “21. FTP Client” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select the appropriate FTP server in the list, and press

<YES>.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

14.Customer ↑

15.Customer Busy Reset

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file

20.Licence Code Entry

21.FTP Clint ↓

0.00

FTP Client

FTP SERVER

1.HEAD OFFICE

2.FTP SERVER 2

3.FTP SERVER 3

4.FTP SERVER 4

5.FTP SERVER 5

6.FTP SERVER 6

7.FTP SERVER 7

8.FTP SERVER 8 ↓

0.00

R-109

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-22. Maintenance data

This command is used to backup the maintenance data to the CF card or clear the data in

the internal flash memory.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “22. Maintenance Data” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select “Data backup to CF” and press the <YES> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

15.Customer Busy Reset ↑

16.Recording

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file

20.Licence Code Entry

21.FTP Client

22.Maintenance Data ↓

0.00

Maintenance Data

1.Data Backup to CF

2.Maintenance Data Clear

0.00

5. Select the appropriate FTP file in the list, and press <YES>.

The process programmed in the file 912 / 913 is executed.

6. Check the execution result and press <ESC> to exit.

FTP Client

FTP FILE

1.FTP FILE 1

2.FTP FILE 2

3.FTP FILE 3

4.FTP FILE 4

5.FTP FILE 5

6.FTP FILE 6

7.FTP FILE 7

8.FTP FILE 8 ↓

0.00

FTP Client

FTP SERVER HEAD OFFICE

FTP FILE Daily PLU

Normal End

0.00

R-110

Manager Operation

5. You can enter file prefix, if you want to change. And select

“YES” and press the <YES> key.

The log file contains;

•System error log: LOGFILE.148 (file-148, 149)

•Operation log: LOGFILE.248 (file-248, 249)

•Packet log: LOGFILE.348 (file-348, 349)

6. Insert the CF card and press the <YES> key.

•In case of selecting “Maintenance Data Clear”, the terminal clears file-148, 248, 348, 149, 249 and

349.

3-3-23. Printer logo send

This command is used to send the edited printer logo to the external (RS-232C/ LAN)

printer(s).

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Select “23. Printer Logo Send” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select appropriate pritnter “RS-232C printer / LAN printer”

and press the <YES> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Manager Mode

16.Recording ↑

17.Print Batch Mainte

18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT

19.Re-Index Scan file

20.Licence Code Entry

21.FTP Client

22.Maintenance Data

23.Printer Logo Send ↓

0.00

Printer Logo Send

1.RS-232C Printer

2.LAN Printer

0.00

Maintenance Data

File name LOGFILE.???

OK? YES

0.00

Maintenance Data

LOG FILE.???

Are you sure to backup?

0.00

R-111

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-3-24. Clerk number

You can program clerk number directly to the <CLK#> key in the MGR mode.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Enter “00” and the clerk number you want to set and press the

appropriate <CLK#> key.

(Entering “000000” clears the clerk number program.)

4. To terminate this step, press the <ST> key.

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Start... 0.00

MGR

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

001111

01 097

002222

02 098

003333

03 099

004444

04 100

04 0

Hard key code

3-3-25. Operation monitor

You can monitor a clerk’s operation by monitoring display.

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <Manager> to assign manager mode.

3. Enter “99990000nn (nn: terminal ID No. to monitor)” and

press the <ST> to start operation monitor.

Note: Do not designate the monitored or monitoring terminal.

The display shows the screen of the monitored terminal.

4. Press <ESC> twice break the monitoring.

(RS-232C printer)

normal end

error end (error code)

5. Execute this command at the terminal which is connected

with RS-232C printer(s).

(LAN printer)

normal end

error end (error code)

5. Execute this command at a terminal in the cluster.

RS-232C Printer

/1 Normal End

/2 Error End xxxx

0.00

LAN Printer

L1 Normal End

L2 Error End xxxx

0.00

R-112

Manager Operation

3-4. System command execution

System command functions are provided to perform nonregistration operations, such as

collection / consolidation system control, backup / restore operation of files in the

terminals, and remote power on / off control.

This chaptershows the X/Z code system for your reference.

3-4-1. X/Z reporting

X/Z command execution

1. Issuing flash report

X/Z mode → <X> or <X/FOR>, <XX>, <XXX>, <X/KETTEN>

2. Issuing other reports

X/Z mode → D7D6D5D4D3D2D1 <#-1>

Meaning of the command data (Scanning/ not found PLU)

Digit Value Meaning

D70 Always

D60 Always

0 Scanning PLU or Not found PLU report

1 Scanning PLU or Not found PLU sales by group/ department/ subdepartment report

2 Scanning PLU or Not found PLU stock by group/ department/ subdepartment report

D53

Scanning PLU or Not found PLUout of stock by group/ department/ subdepartment report

Scanning PLU or Not found PLUbest 50 amount by group/ department/ subdepartment report

Scanning PLU or Not found PLUbest 50quantity by group/ department/ subdepartment report

6 Scanning PLU or Not found PLU 0 sales by group/ department/ subdepartment report

7 Scanning PLU or Not found PLU inactive by group/ department/ subdepartment report

0 Execution in X mode

D41 Execution in Z mode

2 Edit employee data

D30 Always

26 Scanning PLU

D2D127 Not found PLU

R-113

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Meaning of the command data (Other report)

Digit Value Meaning

0 No edition

1 Editing by group

D72 Editing by department

3 Editing by subdepartment

4 Editing by order character

0 No extraction

D61 Inactive (Zero sales)

0 No extraction

D51 By Range

3 Clerk individual

0 Execution in X mode

D41 Execution in Z mode

2 Edit employee data

0 Issuing daily area

1 Issuing periodic 1 area

2 Issuing periodic 2 area

3 Issuing daily consolidation area

4 Issuing periodic 1 consolidation area

5 Issuing periodic 2 consolidation area

71 Flash

00 ~ 09 Batch report 1 ~ 10

11 Fixed totalizer

12 Transaction

14 PLU

64 PLU stock

13 Subdepartment

15 Department

16 Group

17 Clerk

19 Time zone

20 Monthly

23 Simple Time & attendance

D2D125 Open check

28 Table analysis

58 Electronic Journal

91 Electronic journal (search by date and consecutive number)

22 Void reason

24 Hourly / Labor

29 Employee

29 Employee activity

31 Hourly item

52 Customer group

58 Electronic journal

60 Intelligent electronic journal

61 Mix & matce

66 Scan mix & match

67 IDC (1) clear

68 IDC (2) clear

69 IDC (3) clear

R-114

Manager Operation

3-4-2. X/Z collection / consolidation

X/Z collection / consolidation execution

Inline X/Z mode → D14D13D12D11D10D9D8D7D6D5D4D3D2D1 <#-2> → <ESC>

Meaning of the command data

Digit Value Meaning

D4D3

00 All terminal

01 ~ 32 Terminal ID of individual terminal

D2D1

10 Remote power on

11 Remote power off

3-4-3. Remote power control

Remote power control execution

Manager mode → D4D3D2D1 <#-2>

Meaning of the command data

Digit Value Meaning

11110 Collection

D14~D10 11111 Consolidation

11112 Collection and Consolidation

D9D800 Fixed

0 No edition

1 Editing by group

D72 Editing by department

3 Editing by subdepartment

4 Editing by order character

0 No extraction

D61 Inactive (Zero sales)

0 No extraction

D51 By Range

0 Execution in X mode

1 Execution in Z mode

0 Issuing daily area

D31 Issuing periodic 1 area

2 Issuing periodic 2 area

00 ~ 09 Batch report 1 ~ 10

11 Fixed totalizer

12 Transaction

14 PLU

64 PLU stock

13 Subdepartment

15 Department

16 Group

D2D1

17 Clerk

19 Time zone

20 Monthly

22 Void reason

24 Hourly labor

26 Scanning PLU

28 Table analysis

31 Hourly item

58 Electronic Journal

61 Mix & match

66 Scan mix & match

R-115

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-5. Data communication system

The following details the inline and online data communication functions available with

the QT-6600 system.

3-5-1. Inline / online connectors

With the QT-6600, there are the following inline / online connectors in the rear side of the

body.

Inline (Standard) Ethernet

RS-232C COM1 (Standard) For MODEM, or PC

RS-232C COM2 (Standard) For Hand held scanner, Slip printer or Scale

RS-232C COM3 (Standard) For Remote customer display

RS-232C COM4 (Standard) For Remote printer, or Slip printer

RS-232C COM5 (Standard) For Remote printer

RS-232C COM6 (Standard) For Remote printer

DISPLAY

SCANNER

PC/MODEM

COM3

COM6

COM2

COM5

COM1

COM4

SPK

PS/2

KEYBOARD

MIC

LAN

Brightness COM6 COM3 COM2 COM5 COM1 COM4

Inline (10/100Base-T)

PS/2 keyboard

From the AC adaptor

Drawer 2

Drawer 1

Ext. microphone

Ext. speaker

Bottom side of the terminal

R-116

Manager Operation

3-5-2. Hardware interface

3-5-2-1. Inline interface

The maximum inline cable length and the maximum connection unit will be varied by

the inline communication speed as shown below figure.

•Using 10BASE-T

Cable length: 100m (hub to terminal, hub to hub)

Maximum 4 hubs in one cluster.

Maximum cable length between terminal and terminal via hubs is 500m.

•Using 100Base-TX

Cable length: 100m (hub to terminal, hub to hub)

Maximum 2 hubs in one cluster.

Maximum cable length between terminal and terminal via hubs is 300m.

Max.100m

Max.500m

Max.100m

Max.100m Max.100m

Max.100m Max.100m Max.100m

Max.100m cross cable

Max.100m

Max.300m

Max.100m Max.100m

Configuration with Hub

¥ 10BASE-T

¥ 100BASE-TX

Terminal to terminal

¥ 10BASE-T

¥ 100BASE-TX

R-117

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-5-2-2. Online interface

Only the RS-232C COM 1 port can be connected with a modem or a personal computer.

1) Specification of RS-232C COM 1 port

Communication method: Half duplex communication

Configuration of connection: Point-to point

Line type: Public lines / exclusive lines

Starting method: Center (host computer) based start up

Protocol: Async.

Communication speed: 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 bps

Error control: CRC-128 or CRC-1024

Text length: 128 or 1024 bytes

2) The cable diagram between the terminal and MODEM

3) The cable diagram between the terminal and PC

Terminal (COM 1) MODEM

Pin Signal Signal Pin

No. name name No.

3 SD/TDX SD 2

2 RD/RXD RD 3

7 RS/RTS RS 4

8 CS/CTS CS 5

1 CD/DCD CD 8

4 ER/DTR ER 20

6 DR/DSR DR 6

9 CI/RI CI 22

5 GND GND 7

(DSUB25)

Terminal (COM 1) PC

Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin

No. name name No. No.

3 SD/TDX SD 3 2

2 RD/RXD RD 2 3

7 RS/RTS RS 7 4

8 CS/CTS CS 8 5

1 CD/DCD CD 1 8

4 ER/DTR ER 4 20

6 DR/DSR DR 6 6

9 CI/RI CI 22

5 GND GND 5 7

(DSUB25)

(DSUB9)

R-118

Manager Operation

3-5-3. Inline / online functions

3-5-3-1. Inline functions

The list below shows the main functions available with the QT-6600 system.

In case of these functions below are executed, the satellite terminal can receive these

commands even if the satellite terminal is in OFF mode.

1) X/Z data collection for each terminal

2) X/Z data consolidation for each terminal

3) X/Z data collection / consolidation for each terminal

4) Program data copy and upload between terminals (auto-program function)

Functions 1), 2) and 3) can only be performed from a terminal that is programmed as master

in which consolidation files are allocated or PC.

3-5-3-2. Online functions

The QT-6600 can be controlled from the personal computer by connecting it to RS-232C

port 1 (COM1).

In case of sending a command from PC, the terminal can receive this command even if the

terminal is in OFF mode.

R-119

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-6. Collection / Consolidation system

This section provides the general description of the data collection / consolidation system

of the QT-6600. The collection / consolidation system is managed by the master/satellite

system using inline network. Installation of any special hardware devices is not required

for collection / consolidation as inline interfaces are standard feature. Communication is

possible with the connection of inline cable.

In this section, the term “master” means a terminal which collects or consolidates data

registered on each terminal (called “satellite”) connected the inline.

The differences between collection and consolidation are as follows.

– Collection

Outputs the data of the master and individual satellite terminals from the master terminal.

– Consolidation

Totals data from the master and satellites, and then output it to a specific device.

– Collection / Consolidation

Collection and consolidation are performed at the same time.

Types of totalizer files

There are following seven types of totalizer files:

– Daily total files

Daily total files accumulate registered data.

– Periodic total 1 files

These files accumulate registered data at the point of sale, and can be reset independently

from the daily total files. Therefore, the total data within specific period can be accessed

by using these files.

– Periodic total 2 files

These files have same functions as the periodic total 1 files, but can reset independently

for getting the different periodic total data within different period.

– Daily consolidation files

These are files to consolidate the daily data.

– Periodic total 1 consolidation files

These are files to consolidate the periodic 1 data.

– Periodic total 2 consolidation files

These are files to consolidate the periodic 2 data.

– Consolidation work files

These files are work files to collect or consolidate the data of daily total, periodic total 1

or periodic total 2 files.

The daily consolidation files, periodic total 1 consolidation files, periodic total 2 consoli-

dation files and consolidation work files must be reserved as work files at the master

terminal during collection / consolidation operations.

NOTE:

Only a file with the same number of records as the records of corresponding daily total files

need to be reserved. For example, if the number of department is 50, then the same number,

50 records, should be reserved for department of other types.

R-120

Manager Operation

File description and number list

Terminal files Consolidation files

File Daily Periodic 1 Periodic 2 Daily Periodic 1 Periodic 2 Consolidation

description total total total consolidation consolidation consolidation work

Fixed totalizer 001 101 201 301 401 501 601

Transaction key 002 102 202 302 402 502 602

Subdepartment 003 103 203 303 403 503 603

PLU 004 104 204 304 404 504 604

Department 005 105 205 305 405 505 605

Group 006 106 206 306 406 506 606

Clerk detail 011 111 211 311 411 511 611

Hourly sales 009 109 209 309 409 509 609

Monthly sales 010 110 210 310 410 510 610

Void table 012 112 212 312 412 512 612

Table analysis 018 118 218 318 418 518 618

Grand total 020 120 220 320 420 520 620

Hourly item 021 121 221 321 421 521 621

Hourly labor 014 114 214 314 414 514 614

Mix & match 051 151 251 351 451 551 651

Scan Mix & match

056 156 256 356 456 556 656

Customer group 042 142 242 342 442 542 642

Shift PLU 055 155 255 355 455 555 655

Scanning PLU 016 --- --- --- --- --- ---

R-121

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

work

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

work

1, 4

3-6-1. X/Z collection

This function is used to obtain the counters and totals of the individual terminals.

3-6-1-1. X collection processing

X collection processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1An X collection command is started up from the master terminal.

2One objected terminal sends its report data to the consolidation work file of the master.

3Report data from the objected terminal file are printed out on the master's printer.

4After processing of the master terminal completes, the same processes described in the

item 1 to 3 are executed for the other terminals. Data will be sent without the clerk

noticing, even when the satellite in the process of registering.

3-6-1-2. Z collection processing

Z collection processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1When a Z collection command is started up from the master terminal, the master first

locks one objected terminal. (Z lock)

2The objected terminal sends its report data to the consolidation work file of the master

terminal.

3Report data from the satellite terminal file are printed out on the master’s printer.

4The same processes described in the item 1 to 3 are executed for the other terminals.

5After the processing of the master terminal completes, the data of objected terminal file

are cleared, and then the Z lock of the objected terminal is released.

NOTE:

•When a Z collection is performed, the consolidation data cannot be output. If output of

consolidation data is desired, perform “collection/consolidation” processing described

later.

•Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected

remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released.

R-122

Manager Operation

3-6-1-3. X/Z collection command execution

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Inline>.

3. Select “1. Collection” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.

(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types

and kinds.)

5. Select the target terminal(s) and press <YES> key.

In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the <ESC>

key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

6. Press the <ESC> key twice to terminate or to cancelthis

process.

NOTE:

•If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/

NS>) before issuing report.

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Inline X/Z

1.Collection

2.Consolidation

3.Collection & Consolidation

01 0.00

Collection

1.Daily X

2.Periodic(1) X

3.Periodic(2) X

4.Daily Z

5.Periodic(1) Z

6.Periodic(2) Z

01 0.00

Collection

Daily X

1.Batch

2.Cashier/Clerk

3.Customer Account

4.Others

01 0.00

Collection

Target ECR

1.All

2.Terminal A #01

3.Terminal B #02

4.Terminal C ---

5.Terminal D #04

6.Terminal E #05

7.Terminal F #06

8.Terminal G #07

01 0.00

←

Selected terminal

Collection

Inline 11110

Collection 0

MC #01 12:30 0021

MC #02 12:32 0022

MC #03 Error End 0001

MC #04 12:40 0020

01 0.00

←

Reset counter

←

Error code

R-123

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

files

Consolidation

work

3-6-2. X/Z consolidation

This function is used to obtain the sum of counters and totals of all objected terminals in

the store.

After consolidating data from all objected terminals, the master prints the details on the

printer.

Regardless of whether they are in the process of registration, the satellite terminals send

data and do not print out the reports, when X consolidation is performed. But, during the

Z consolidation, satellites are locked from registrations.

3-6-2-1. X consolidation processing

X consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1An X consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

2Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the

consolidation work file.

3The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.

4The same process described in item 1 to 3 is executed for other terminals.

5After the above collection processing is completed for all objected terminals, the data

accumulated in the consolidation work file are reported on the master's printer.

R-124

Manager Operation

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

files

Consolidation

work

1, 6

3-6-2-2. Z consolidation processing (except scanning PLU)

Z consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1A Z consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)

2Data of the objected terminal files are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the

consolidation work file.

3The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.

4After the processing of the master terminal completes, the same processes described in

item 1 to 3 are executed for all other terminals.

5The data accumulated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's printer.

6After the above collection processing completes for all objected terminals, the files of

all objected terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.

3-6-2-3. Z consolidation processing (scanning PLU)

Z consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

1, 5

2, 34

1A Z consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)

2Data of the objected terminal files are sent to the master terminal, and are added to the

master terminal file.

3Step 2 are executed for all other teminals.

4The data accumulated in the master terminal file are reported on the master's printer.

6After the above processing completes for all objected terminals, the files of all objected

terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.

NOTE:

•Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected

remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released. Therefore, retrying

the same operation can be performed.

R-125

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-6-2-4. X/Z consolidation command execution

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <Inline> to assign Inline X/Z.

3. Select “2. Consolidation” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.

(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types

and kinds.)

5. Select the target terminals and press the <YES> key.

In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the <ESC>

key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

6. Press the <ESC> key twice to terminate or to cancel this

process.

NOTE:

•If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/

NS>) before issuing report.

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Inline X/Z

1.Collection

2.Consolidation

3.Collection & Consolidation

01 0.00

Consolidation

1.Daily X

2.Periodic(1) X

3.Periodic(2) X

4.Daily Z

5.Periodic(1) Z

6.Periodic(2) Z

01 0.00

Consolidation

Daily X

1.Batch

2.Cashier/Clerk

3.Customer Account

4.Others

01 0.00

Consolidation

Target ECR

1.All

2.Terminal A #01

3.Terminal B #02

4.Terminal C ---

5.Terminal D #04

6.Terminal E #05

7.Terminal F #06

8.Terminal G #07

01 0.00

←

Selected terminal

Consolidation

Inline 11111

Consolidation 0

MC #01 12:30 0021

MC #02 12:32 0022

MC #03 Error End 0001

MC #04 12:40 0020

01 0.00

←

Reset counter

←

Error code

R-126

Manager Operation

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

files

Consolidation

work

3-6-3. X/Z collection / consolidation

This function is used to obtain the counters and totals of the individual terminals

(collection) and of all objected terminals in the store (consolidation) by one procedure.

After printing collection report on the master's printer, the master prints the consolidation

report. Regardless whether they are in the process of registration, the satellite terminals

send data and do not print out the reports, when X collection / consolidation is performed.

But, during the Z collection / consolidation, satellites are locked from registrations.

After consolidating data from all objected terminals, the master prints the details on the

printer.

3-6-2-1. X collection/consolidation processing

X collection/consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1An X collection / consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

2Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the

consolidation work file.

3The data in the consolidation work file is reported on the master's R/J printer.

4The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.

5The same process described in item 1 to 4 is executed for other terminals.

6After the above collection processing is completed for all terminals, the data accumu-

lated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's R/J printer.

R-127

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Satellite Master

Terminal

files

Terminal

files

Consolidation

files

Consolidation

work

1, 7

3-6-3-2. Z collection / consolidation processing

Z collection/consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1A Z collection / consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)

2Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the

consolidation work file.

3The data in the consolidation work file are reported on the master's printer.

4The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.

5After the master terminal's processing completes, the same processes described in item

1 to 4 are executed for all other terminals.

6The data accumulated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's printer.

7After the above collection processing completes for all terminals, the files of all satellite

terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.

NOTE:

•Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected

remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released. Therefore, retrying

the same operation can be performed.

R-128

Manager Operation

3-6-2-3. X/Z collection / consolidation command execution

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press the <MODE> and <Inline> key to assign Inline X/Z.

3. Select “3. Collection & Consolidation” and press the <YES>

key.

4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.

(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types

and kinds.)

5. Select the target terminals and press the <YES> key.

In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the <ESC>

key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

6. Press the <ESC> key twice to terminate or to cancel this

process.

NOTE:

•If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/

NS>) before issuing report.

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Inline X/Z

1.Collection

2.Consolidation

3.Collection & Consolidation

01 0.00

Collection&Consolidation

1.Daily X

2.Periodic(1) X

3.Periodic(2) X

4.Daily Z

5.Periodic(1) Z

6.Periodic(2) Z

01 0.00

Collection&Consolidation

Daily X

1.Batch

2.Cashier/Clerk

3.Customer Acoount

4.Others

01 0.00

Collection&Consolidation

Target ECR

1.All

2.Terminal A #01

3.Terminal B #02

4.Terminal C ---

5.Terminal D #04

6.Terminal E #05

7.Terminal F #06

8.Terminal G #07

01 0.00

←

Selected terminal

Collection&Consolidation

Inline 11112

Collection&Conso 0

MC #01 12:30 0021

MC #02 12:32 0022

MC #03 Error End 0001

MC #04 12:40 0020

01 0.00

←

Reset counter

←

Error code

R-129

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3-7. Auto-programming function

Using the auto programming function makes it possible to save and load the terminal

program files. Methods available for saving the terminal program are as follows:

1) Saving onto another terminal connected through inline.

2) Saving onto a personal computer connected through inline/ online.

3) Saving onto a CF card inserted in the CF card slot.

To ensure quick recovery from a corrupted file resulting from user error or system failure,

it is recommended that you maintain back up copies of current terminal programs on a file

basis.

Terminal program files can be loaded using procedures opposite to those used for saving.

Note:

Data except for program data, such as data in totalizers, counters, and work area, cannot

be saved by the auto programming function. (except for copying all data)

Caution:

Do not remove a CF card during sending / receiving data from/to it.

3-7-1. Auto-programming functions

The QT-6600 terminal is capable of saving and loading terminal program files. The

terminal program file has the following transfer functions:

1) Copy all terminal files (send / receive)

(send: activation by source terminal / receive: activation by target terminal)

This function copies all terminal files with counters and totalizers. When a file is not

reserved on the target terminal, that file is created automatically.

2) Copy all terminal program files (send / receive)

This function copies all terminal files without counters and totalizers. When a file is not

reserved on the target terminal, the processing for that file is skipped.

3) Copy individual terminal program files (send / receive)

This function copies the specific terminal program file (except system work files)

without counters and totalizers.

4) Copy unit price field of particular files (send / receive)

This function copies the unit price field of specific files (i.e. PLU, PLU 2nd@).

R-130

Manager Operation

3-7-2. Auto-program operation and CF card utilities

The procedures of auto program function

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)

2. Press the <MODE> and <AUTO PGM> key to assign “AUTO

PGM.”

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the

guidance. The hierarchy of the AUTO PGM menus are

described below.

Auto-program menu hierarchy

Send / Receive Copy All

Unit Price only

Range

(Send only)

Individual Files

All Data

All PGM

PLU

PLU 2nd@

PLU

PLU 2nd@

Fixed Totalizer

Free Function

Sub Department

PLU

Department

Group Character

Cashier / Clerk

Void

Scanning PLU

Multi EAN file

Batch Maintenance

NLU File

Non PLU table

Scan Mix & Match

Table Analysis

GT Character

General Feature

Special Character

Report Header

Tax Tabl e

Pulldown Group

Set Menu Table

Clerk key ID

Batch X / Z

Clerk Detail

Receipt / SLIP Msg

Endorse Message

ARG GP1

ARG GP2

ARG GP3

ARG GP4

ARG GP5

Text Recall

Check Print

Graphic Logo

PLU 2nd@

Shift PLU

Scheduler

Order Char Link

Keyboard

Character Keyboard

System Connection

I / O Parameter

Printer Connection

Hourly/Item Link

Mix & match

Time Zone

Employee

Job Code

Schedule

IDC Link

Euro (Sub Currency) Pres

Auto Pgm control

Screen Color

Customer

Customer GP

Customer Title

Menu Title

CF X/Z Conv

Check Window

Clerk Window

Sound (1)

Sound (2)

Sound (10)

Color Definition

Color Theme

BMP Picture

Additional BMP Picture

FTP Login Password

FTP Server Name

FTP Trans File

User logo

Check Window 21

Check Window 22

Check Window 23

Keys for Check Window

Free Function List

Tare Table

Additional PLU Character

Additional Item Program

Additional Order Control

Sign Off Reason

PC Keyboard

TCP/IP

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

AUTO PGM

1.Send

2.Receive

0.00

R-131

QT-6600 Reference Manual

The procedure of Data Backup to the CF card

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)

2. Press the <CF CARD> key to assign “CF card.”

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the

guidance. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.

The hierarchy of the Data Backup is described below.

Data Backup menu hierarchy

Backup Copy All

Individual Files

All Data

All PGM

Fixed Totalizer

Free Function

Sub Department

PLU

Department

Group Character

Cashier / Clerk

Void

Scanning PLU

Multi EAN file

Batch Maintenance

NLU File

Non PLU table

Scan Mix & Match

Table Analysis

GT Character

General Feature

Special Character

Report Header

Tax Tabl e

Pulldown Group

Set Menu Table

Clerk key ID

Batch X / Z

Clerk Detail

Receipt / SLIP Msg

Endorse Message

ARG GP1

ARG GP2

ARG GP3

ARG GP4

ARG GP5

Text Recall

Check Print

Graphic Logo

PLU 2nd@

Shift PLU

Scheduler

Order Char Link

Keyboard

Character Keyboard

System Connection

I / O Parameter

Printer Connection

Hourly/Item Link

Mix & match

Time Zone

Employee

Job Code

Schedule

IDC Link

Euro (Sub Currency) Preset

Auto Pgm control

Screen Color

Customer

Customer GP

Customer Title

Menu Title

CF X/Z Conv

Check Window

Clerk Window

Sound (1)

Sound (2)

Sound (10)

Color Definition

Color Theme

BMP Picture

Additional BMP Picture

FTP Login Password

FTP Server Name

FTP Trans File

User logo

Check Window 21

Check Window 22

Check Window 23

Keys for Check Window

Free Function List

Tare Table

TCP/IP

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

CF Card

1.Data Backup

2.Data Restore

3.Backup File List

4.CF Card Format

0.00

R-132

Manager Operation

The procedure of Data Restore from the CF card

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)

2. Press the <MODE> and <CF CARD> key to assign “CF

card.”

3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.

Select “2. Data Restore” and press the <YES> key.

4. Select the appropriate file you want to restore.

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

CF Card

1.Data Backup

2.Data Restore

3.Backup File List

4.CF Card Format

0.00

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

Data Restore

1.FILE004P.004

2.FILE090P.090

3.FILE028P.028

0.00

R-133

QT-6600 Reference Manual

The procedures of taking the file list of the CF card and deleting the file

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)

2. Press the <MODE> and <CF CARD> key to assign “CF

card.”

3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.

Select “3. Backup File List” and press the <YES> key.

4. In case of deleting a file, select the appropriate file and press

the <YES> key.

The procedures of formatting the CF card

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)

2. Press the <MODE> and <CF CARD> key to assign “CF

card.”

3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.

Select “4. CF Card Format” and press the <YES> key.

4. Press the <YES> key to continue formatting, <NO> means

abortion.

Backup File List

FILE001P.001 10-10-01 10:00

FILE002P.002 10-10-01 10:01

FILE003P.003 10-10-01 10:02

0.00

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

This procedure deletes all

data in the CF Card.

Are you sure to format?

0.00

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

CF Card

1.Data Backup

2.Data Restore

3.Backup File List

4.CF Card Format

0.00

X/Z

01 10-10-01 12:34 000000

CF Card

1.Data Backup

2.Data Restore

3.Backup File List

4.CF Card Format

0.00

R-134

Manager Operation

R-135

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. Registrations ........................................................................................ R-134

4-1. Clerk sign on / off operation ............................................................................ R-134

4-2. Voiding the last registered item (<VOID> key operation) ................................ R-135

4-3. Voiding the previous registered item (<VOID> key operation)......................... R-136

4-4. Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction .................................. R-136

4-5. Using the list function ...................................................................................... R-138

4-6. Using the set menu function and pulldown group function .............................. R-139

4-7. Post entry ........................................................................................................ R-142

4-8. Separate check ............................................................................................... R-143

4-9. Open check ..................................................................................................... R-144

4-9. Split payment (Dutch account) ........................................................................ R-144

4-10. Media change.................................................................................................. R-145

4-11. Eat-in / Takeout ............................................................................................... R-146

4-12. Scanning PLU ................................................................................................. R-146

4-13. Shift PLU ......................................................................................................... R-149

4-14. Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)........................................ R-149

4-15. Round repeat function ..................................................................................... R-150

4-16. Mix & match / coupon...................................................................................... R-151

4-17. Customer......................................................................................................... R-152

4-18. Table sharing ................................................................................................... R-153

4-19. Order character change .................................................................................. R-153

4-20. Item search ..................................................................................................... R-153

4-21. Scan Mix & match ........................................................................................... R-154

4-22. Time calculation .............................................................................................. R-155

4-23. Additional PLU character ................................................................................ R-156

R-136

Registration

4. Registrations

This section describes characteristic registrations of the QT-6600.

Key catch tone, error tone volume can be controlled by the <LEFT/RIGHT ARROW> key.

4-1. Clerk sign on / off operation

The following examples illustrate the clerk sign on / off operation.

•When an i-Button key is used, sign on operation can be performed by attaching the clerk

key to the receiver by the appropriate i-Button key.

Note: After initialization, i-Button key ID should be set.

• When a clerk ID number is programmed for the clerk key, sign on operation can be

performed by merely pressing the clerk key on the keyboard or in the clerk pop-up

window.

It is the same procedure that even clerks are assigned as “clerk”, “cashier” or “manager.”

1) Clerk sign on operation (Clerk key has the clerk number setting.)

1. Just press the appropriate <CLERK> key in the keyboard or

in the clerk pop-up window.

2) Clerk sign on operation (Clerk key has no clerk number setting.)

In case of the store has many clerks to control, you need not allocate all clerk keys on the

keyboard but allocate a few clerk key and program no clerk number one of the clerk key.

1. Press the <CLERK> key, if you want to display no clerk

number entries.

REG 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CLK# ----

Please sign on.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

REG Mode

Please sign on.

Clerk window 1

C01 C02

C03 C04

C05 C06

C07 C08

C09 C10

NEXT PREV

(clerk pop-up window)

R-137

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Enter the appropriate clerk number and press the <CLERK>

key.

3) Clerk sign off operation

1. Enter “0” and press the <CLERK> key.

4-2. Voiding the last registered item (<VOID> key operation)

Use the <VOID> key to cancel a data that has just been registered using a function key. The

<VOID> key can be used to cancel data registered using departments, subdepartments,

PLUs, scan PLUs, partial tenders, or the <PRICE>, <+>, <–>, <%+>, <%–>, <LOAN> or

<PICKUP> key. You can only use the <VOID> key to cancel a registration if you have not

yet started registration of the next item.

1. Wrong registration is made.

2. Press the <VOID> key to cancel the data and reregister the

transaction.

REG 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CLK# --**

Please sign on.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

0.00

Please sign on.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

10%

%- -0.10

1 ST •0.90

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

VOID •0.10

1 ST •1.00

R-138

Registration

4-3. Voiding the previous registered item (<VOID> key operation)

If data has been registered using a function key and registration of the next item has begun,

use the <VOID> key to cancel previous registered data. Entries using departments,

subdepartments, PLUs or scan PLUs can be cancelled using the <VOID> key.

1. Wrong registration is made.

2. Press the <UP ARROW> or <DOWN ARROW> key to

designate the item registration.

3. Press the <VOID> key to cancel the item and reregister the

transaction.

4-4. Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction

Press the <CANCEL> key to cancel all data registered (except partial tendering) during

the transaction. This operation lets you clear registered data and restart from the beginning.

The cancel operation must be performed before the transaction is finalized.

1. Wrong registration is made.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

3 PLU0003 •9.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

PLU0004 •4.00

6 •16.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

3 PLU0003 •9.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

PLU0004 •4.00

6 •16.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

3 PLU0003 •9.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

PLU0004 •4.00

6 •16.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

PLU0003 -9.00

3 ST •7.00

R-139

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Press the <CANCEL> key.

3. Press the <YES> key to cancel the transaction.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

3 PLU0003 •9.00

Cancel OK?

PLU0004 •4.00

6 •16.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

3 PLU0003 •9.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

CANCEL •••••••••••••

CANCEL 0.00

Please sign on.

R-140

Registration

4-5. Using the list function

Before using the LIST function, the following programs are necessary to use this function.

1) Allocating the <LIST> key or the <LIST-#> key (page 26 of the programming manual)

In case of using the <LIST> key, <LIST> key(s) should be allocated on the keyboard

before step 2.

2) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)

3) Programming item price (page 140 of the programming manual)

Normal registration by using the <LIST> and <LIST-#> key

(List pop-up window)

1. Press the <LIST> key or enter the list No. and press the

<LIST-#> key. Then the List pop-up window is opened on the

keyboard.

2. Select the appropriate item.

Direct selection by using the <LIST> key

1. Press the appropriate record number and press the <LIST>

key brings direct selection of the item.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0001 •10.00

1 •10.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0001 •10.00

1 •10.00

↓

PLU 1

PLU 2

PLU 3

← Select one of these.

←

LIST01 0/1-1

PLU001 PLU002

PLU003 PLU004

PLU005 PLU006

PLU007 PLU008

PLU009 PLU010

R-141

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Before using the pulldown group function, the following programs are necessary to use this

function.

1) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)

2) Programming PLU “List Link No.” (page 88 of the programming manual)

3) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)

1. Register the parent (main) PLU. The list linked appears.

2. Select the appropriate (child/grandchild) PLU.

4-6. Using the set menu function and pulldown group function

4-6-1. Using the Set Menu function

Before using the set menu function, the following programs are necessary to use this

function.

1) Programming set menu table (page 33 of the programming manual)

2) Programming PLU “Set menu table linking” (page 88 of the programming manual)

3) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)

1. Registering a PLU linked to a set menu.

4-6-2. Using the Pulldown group function

PLU (Parent) registration

↓

Child PLU 1

Child PLU 2

Child PLU 3

← Select one of these.

←

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0001 •10.00

1 •10.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0012 •1.00

PLU0001 •10.00

2 •11.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

1 PLU0012 •1.00

1 PLU0015

PLU0001 •10.00

2 •11.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0002

PLU0003

PLU0004

PLU0001 •10.00

1 •10.00

}

Set Menu linked to PLU0001

(select “set menu breakdown printing”

LIST02 0/1-1

PLU010 PLU011

PLU012 PLU013

LIST10 0/1-1

PLU014 PLU015

PLU016 PLU017

(List pop-up window) (List pop-up window)

R-142

Registration

4-6-3. Using the set menu and pulldown group function

Before using the set menu and pulldown group function, the following programs are

necessary to use this function.

1) Programming set menu table (page 33 of the programming manual)

2) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)

3) Programming PLU “Set menu table linking” and “List Link No.” (page 88 of the

programming manual)

4) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)

1.Registering a PLU linked to a set menu and pulldown group.

2. Select the appropriate item.

If there are more pulldown groups linked to the PLU, next

pulldown group appears on the screen.

4-6-4. Using the substitution key

Normally, you can select item(s) in a pulldown group. If the customer requires to take an

item from another set menu/pulldown group, the <SUBSTITUTION> key should be used.

1. A PLU linked to a pulldown group is registered, but no items

in the list can be selected.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0002

PLU0003

PLU0004

PLU0001 •10.00

1 •10.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •10.00

PLU0002

PLU0003

PLU0004

1 PLU0010

PLU0001 •10.00

2 •11.00

}

Set Menu linked to PLU0001

← Selected in the LIST01

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0020 •10.00

1 PLU0021 •20.00

PLU0021 •10.00

2 •30.00

PLU0001

PLU0002, PLU0003, PLU0004

LIST01

↓

PLU0010

PLU0011

PLU0012

PLU0013

← Select one of these.

←

LIST01 0/1-1

PLU010 PLU011

PLU012 PLU013

LIST01 0/1-1

PLU001 PLU002

PLU003 PLU004

(List pop-up window)

}

Set Menu linked to PLU0001

R-143

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Press the <SUBSTITUTION> key.

3. Register the appropriate item.

4-6-5. Inner multiplication

Normally, the quantity of list linked PLU or set menu child PLU follows the same quantity

as main PLU. But it is possible to register a different number of list linked PLU or child

PLU from the number of main PLU.

Before using the inner multiplication, the following program is necessary in addition to the

Pulldown Group or Set Menu Table to use this function.

Note) Program”Fast food” in the “Set Menu / Condiment” program (page 45 of the

programming manual)

1. An multiplication of a PLU is made.

2. Enter appropriate quantity and press the <X> key.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0020 •10.00

1 PLU0021 •20.00

1 PLU0050 •50.00

PLU0050 •50.00

3 •80.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

3 PLU0001 •30.00

PLU0001 •30.00

3 •30.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

3 PLU0001 •30.00

X 2

3 •30.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0020 •10.00

1 PLU0021 •20.00

SUBST. 0.00

2 •30.00

LIST01 0/1-1

PLU001 PLU002

PLU003 PLU004

LIST01 00

PLU010 PLU011

PLU012 PLU013

LIST01 00

PLU010 PLU011

PLU012 PLU013

(List pop-up window)

R-144

Registration

3. Select the appropriate PLU (in case of pulldown group.)

4-7. Post entry

Post entry is used to suspend the selectable item in the pulldown window of a set menu and

a set menu. (This function is only effective in check tracking operation.)

4-7-1. To suspend the selection

1. Enter the <POST ENTRY> key to suspend the selection.

2. The key descriptor shows the suspended item.

4-7-2. To register the suspended item

1. Open the check and designate “POST ENTRY” by ?, >.

Pressing the <POST ENTRY> key recalls the pulldown

menu screen to select items.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

3 PLU0001 •30.00

2 PLU0010 •2.00

PLU0010 •2.00

5 •32.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 Lunch menu •12.00

Soup

Chicken

with pepper

Sirloin

Rare

French

Pea

0.00

1 •12.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 Lunch menu •12.00

Soup

Chicken

with pepper

Sirloin

Rare

French

Pea

POST ENTRY

0.00

1 •12.00

← the suspended item

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 Lunch menu •12.00

Soup

Chicken

with pepper

Sirloin

Rare

French

Pea

POST ENTRY

0.00

1 •12.00

LIST01 02

PLU010 PLU011

PLU012 PLU013

Dessert 02

Of the day Cheese cake

A la carte Beverage

(List pop-up window)

R-145

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-8. Separate check

Separate check is used to transfer the registered items in the original check to the other

check or pick up the registered items in the original check to finalize them.

1. Enter the check number to which the registered items are

transferred and press the <NEW/OLD CHK> key.

2. Enter 123456 and press the <SEPARATE

CHECK> key. Then the separate check win-

dow is opened.

3. Select the transferring items in the original

check column (it is transferred to the other

check column). If you want to separate item

line, press <KEYPAD> key and enter the

quantity you want to separate.

4. After selecting items, press the <OK> key in the separate

check window to terminate. The selected items are trans-

ferred to other check.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

222222

NEW/OLD 222222

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

222222

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

ST •6.00

0.00

2 ST •6.00

#123456 1

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

1 PLU0005 •5.00

•15.00 •0.00

KEYPAD OK CANCEL

PAGE

↑

↓

PAGE

DOWN

#123456 1

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

1 PLU0004 •4.00

1 PLU0005 •5.00

•9.00 •6.00

KEYPAD OK CANCEL

PAGE

↑

↓

PAGE

DOWN

R-146

Registration

4-9. Open check

To display or print out the opened check report of the signed on operator.

1. Enter the record number of the signed on clerk.

2. Press the <OPEN CHK> key.

3. The open check report is issued or displayed (depends on the

program).

4-9. Split payment (Dutch account)

This key is used to share the total payment by customer.

1. After finalizing a receipt, enter the number of customer

(within 2-digits) and press the <SPLIT PAYMENT > key.

2. Issue shared total receipts per customer.

Receipt for the last customer Receipt for other customers

Note: The fractions are included in the last customer.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

0.01

REG

01 15-12-03 12:34 000001

X 0000025 OPEN CHK

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-03 12:50 001190

CHECK No.

1328

•100.35

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-03 12:55 001195

CHECK No.

1330

MC #01

REG

01 15-12-03 12:58 001205

CHECK No.

1363

0.01

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •12.00

1 PLU0002 •15.00

2 PLU0003 •10.00

•37.00

CASH •37.00

SPLIT PAYMENT 3

MC #01

REG

01 12-31-2003 12:34 000123

SPLIT PAYMENT •12.34

•12.34

CASH •12.34

MC #01

REG

01 12-31-2003 12:34 000123

SPLIT PAYMENT •12.33

•12.33

CASH •12.33

R-147

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-10. Media change

This key is used to change media in drawer amounts. Pressing this key begins media change

operation.

1. First press the <MEDIA CHANGE> key.

2. Enter the in drawer amount to be changed and press the media

key to be changed.

3. Enter the amount to change and press the media to change,

until the change amount equals to the changed amount.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

MEDIA CHG

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

MEDIA CHG •••••••••••••

CASH -10.00

•10.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

MEDIA CHG •••••••••••••

CASH -10.00

CHECK •2.00

•8.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

MEDIA CHG •••••••••••••

CASH -10.00

CHECK •2.00

CREDIT •8.00

R-148

Registration

4-11. Eat-in / Takeout

This function is used for specifying if the customer eat in the restaurant or takeout.

1. When the <EAT-IN> or <TAKEOUT> key is pressed before finalization, tax exemption

will be applied.

After registering one of these keys, it is impossible to register items except void, cancel,

subtotal, finalize and partial payment (including subtotal according to the currency

conversion.) If you want to release the compulsory, press the <OPEN 2> key.

2. When the <EAT-IN> or <TAKEOUT> key is pressed, tax status change will be applied.

Be sure to program before using this function.

Example of receipt image

1 Hamburger •2.00

1 French fries •1.50

1 Coffee •1.00

TAKE-OUT

4-12. Scanning PLU

This function is used for registering PLU items by scanner or OBR code <OBR>.

Before using this function, you should allocate the scanning PLU file (file no. 16), connect

a scanner and allocate <OBR> key (function code = 103). Applicable OBR codes are EAN-

13, EAN-8 and UPC-A.

To register a scanning PLU item

1. Just scan the item PLU0100.

2. Enter the OBR code on the label and press the <OBR> key.

Not found PLU registration

When you scan an item which is not set in the scanning PLU file, not found error (E028)

occurs. In this case, press <NFP> key and perform a department registration. After this

procedure, this not found item is registered by department and is set to the scanning PLU

file.

<NFP> key : function code = 142

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0100 •1.00

PLU0100 •1.00

1 ST •1.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0100 •1.00

1 PLU0101 •2.00

PLU0101 •2.00

2 ST •3.00

R-149

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1. Scan an not found item.

2. Press the <NFP> key, enter unit price and press the appropriate

department key.

Non PLU

QT-6600 accepts both PLU type and non PLU type barcode. Non PLU type barcode

includes item price/ weight. In case of registering non PLU type barcode, you should

program Non PLU table file before you use (program or register) scanning PLU items.

Refer to 4-4-5 Programming Non PLU table in the programming manual.

Non PLU table file : file no. 976

Scanning PLU maintenance

There are two ways to maintenance scanning PLU file. One is the direct maintenance and

the other is the batch maintenance. By the direct maintenance, you can add or modify

scanning PLU items directly.

By batch maintenance, you can add, modify or delete scanning PLU items to/ from the

scanning PLU file. The procedure to perform batch maintenance, program to the batch

maintenance file first, and execute batch maintenance file.

Refer to 4-4-1 Programming direct maintenance in the programming manual.

Refer to 4-4-2 Programming batch maintenance in the programming manual.

Refer to 3-3-18 Execute batch maintenance file in this manual.

Batch maintenance file : file no. 070

Price change

You can register a scanning PLU item not by the preset price in the scanning PLU file but

a new price. The method to register by a new price is as follows:

1. Enter new price and press the <PRICE CHANGE> key.

2. Perform scanning PLU registration. (This item should be programmed as an open PLU.)

<PRICE CHANGE> key : function code = 104

Mix & match

For scanning PLU, refer to 4-21 Scan Mix and match section.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 DEPT01 •1.00

DEPT01 •1.00

2 ST •2.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

E028 Not found PLU or

C/D is mismatch.

•1.00

1 ST •1.00

R-150

Registration

Add on code

QT-6600 has a capavility to log the supplemental (add-on) barcode data with main

barcode.

The add-on code is logged to the Add on/ VMP file (file-040) with main barcode, shop

code, consecutive number, date, time and item quantity.

The barcode data of the main item should be programmed to the Non PLU table.

Shop code is programmed to the 48-th record of the general control file.

Multi EAN link

If you want to register an item as the item with different barcode data, program the barcode

data of the linked item and the parent item to the multi EAN link file (file no. = 075).

Refer to 4-4-3 Programming multi EAN link of the programming manual.

R-151

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-13. Shift PLU

This key is used to shift a flat PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 8) level or a scanning PLU to

the m-th (m = 1 ~ 7).Before using this function, you should allocate the shift PLU file (file-

055), or scanning PLU shift (2) ~ (7) (file-116 ~ 616), and allocate the <SHIFT PLU> key

s(function code = 065), and program the shift level (1 ~ 8) to each <SHIFT PLU> key. Since

each shift PLU/ scanning PLU shift file has its own unit prices, counters and totalizers, you

can see the sales quantity / amount of an item by size (S, M, L), quantity etc.

Shift PLU and 2nd @ are incompatible.

Registration example

Flat PLU:

1. Register <PLU0001> <PLU0001>

level-2 200 <PLU0001> <SHIFT PLU (level2)>

200 <PLU0001>

level-3 <PLU0001> <SHIFT PLU (level3)>

<CASH>

Scanning PLU:

1. Register <PLU0001> <Scan PLU0001>

level-2 <PLU0001> <SHIFT PLU (level2)>

level-3 <PLU0001> <SHIFT PLU (level3)>

<CASH>

4-14. Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)

This function is used for registering old check by scanning the barcode on the new balance

receipt or issuing guest receipt by scanning the barcode on the finalizing receipt.

(This function is available without allocating scanning PLU file.)

Example of receipt image

1 Hamburger $2.00

1 French fries $1.50

1 Coffee $1.00

NB $4.50

— Barcode

2800000012342 — Numeric code

Check number (within 4-digits)

Flag code: After <NEW BALANCE> = 28

After Finalization = 29

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0001 •2.00

1 PLU0001 •3.00

CASH •6.00

R-152

Registration

4-15. Round repeat function

This function is used for repeating registered items of the last receipt finalized by <NEW

BALANCE> key in check tracking system or clerk interrupt operation.

1. To issue the original receipt.

1111 <NEW/OLD>

2. Enter the check number of this receipt and press the <NEW/

OLD> key.

3. Press <ROUND REPEAT> to recall the last receipt.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

1111

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

---------------------------------------

NEW/OLD 1111

3 ST •6.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

1111

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

SRVC TL

•6.00

SRVC TL •6.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

1111

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

---------------------------------------

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

SRVC TL

•12.00

SRVC TL •12.00

R-153

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-16. Mix & match / coupon

Please note, that the target item of this type of mix & match is PLU, Flat-PLU, Department,

Subdepartment.

Before using the mix & match / coupon function, the following programs are necessary to

use this function.

1) Programming mix & match table (page 63 of the programming manual)

•Discount type (mix & match discount/amount reduction or coupon)

•Minus or discount (%-)

•Discount amount or rate

•Coupon random code (if coupon type is selected)

•Target item (PLU, Flat-PLU, Department, Subdepartment), bundle quantity

2) Allocate coupon number key,if necessaty. (Function code = 110).

Mix and match type

1. Item registration:

<PLU0003> (Discount is performed automatically.)

Coupon type

1. Item registration:

<1234> <CPN#> (Discount is performed automatically.)

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0011 •1.00

1 PLU0012 •2.00

1 PLU0013 •3.00

DISCOUNT02 -0.12

1234

3 ST •5.88

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

DISCOUNT01 -0.12

PLU0003 •3.00

3 ST •5.88

R-154

Registration

4-17. Customer

Before using the customer function, the following programs are necessary to use this

function.

1) Allocating customer file (File-037), customer group file (File-042)

Check index file and check detail file are also necessary.

2) Allocating customer ID number key (148), payment key (149), table transfer key (014).

3) Program “Customer Control”, and “Customer Group”, refer to the page 69 of the

programming manual.

4) Program customer No., name, title, address, etc to the customer file, refer to the page 101

of the reference manual.

Item registration

1. Enter customer No. and press the <CUST# > (customer ID

No.) key.

2. Perform item registration.

(You can re-enter the customer ID No.)

3. Press the <TABLE TRANSFER> key to finalize the transac-

tion.

Payment (by <PAYMENT> key)

1. Press the <PAYMENT> key.

2. Enter customer No. and press the <CUST#> (customer ID

No.) key.

3. Perform a finalize operation.

Note:

Pressing the <CUST#> directly shows customer No. and name window to specify the

customer. Also you can enter a new customer data here in case of allowing to create a new

customer.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

DISC -0.60

TBL TRANS

•5.40

TBL TRANS 1

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CUST0001

1CT

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

DISC -0.60

---------------------------------------

•5.40

CASH •6.00

CG •0.60

R-155

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-18. Table sharing

Before using the table sharing function, the following programs are necessary to use this

function.

1) Allocating table sharing key (261).

2) Program to enable table sharing function (refer to the page 46 of the programming

manual.)

1. In case of designating the same table (check) No. which has

already been occupied, the terminal add the branch No. to the

table No. and open this check as a new check.

(The branch No. (1 ~ 9) is added to prefix to the original table

No.)

1: branch No.

123456: original table (check) No.

4-19. Order character change

Before using this function, the following programs are necessary.

1) Allocating order character file (File-065).

2) Allocating order character change key (252).

3) Linking order character record No.: if necessary

1. By pressing <ORDER CHARACTER CHANGE> key, the

order character window appears in the screen.

You can select the appropriate order character in the window.

(If the linking order character record No. is set, the order

character is changed to the linking character automatically.)

4-20. Item search

Before using this function, the following programs are necessary.

1) Allocating item search key (246).

2) Searching range: By group / subdepartment / department and its record No.

A1.By pressing <ITEM SEARCH> key, the character program

keyboard appears on the screen.

A2.You can search the item by entering the item descriptor.

B1. By pressing <ITEM SEARCH> key, the pulldown group like

window appears on the screen.

B2. You can select the item in the window.

C1. By pressing <ITEM SEARCH> key, the flat-PLU like key-

board appears on the screen.

C2. You can select the item in the keyboard.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

CHECK No.

123456.1

NEW CHK 123456.1

ORDER CHAR

1.ORDER CHAR01

2.ORDER CHAR02

3.ORDER CHAR03

4.ORDER CHAR04

5.ORDER CHAR05

6.ORDER CHAR06

7.ORDER CHAR07

8.ORDER CHAR08 ↓

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

Found Items

1.PLU001

2.PLU002

3.PLU003

4.PLU004

5.PLU005

6.PLU006

7.PLU007

8.PLU008 ↓

0.00

R-156

Registration

4-21. Scan Mix & match

Please note, that the target item of this type of mix & match is scanning PLU.

Before using the scan mix & matchfunction, the following programs are necessary to use

this function.

1) Programming scan mix & match table (page 124 of the programming manual)

•Discount type (mix & match discount, amount reduction type or free item type)

•Minus or discount (%-)

•Discount amount or rate

•Free item barcode (if free item type is selected)

2) Programming scanning PLU

•Scan mix & match link.

Mix and match type

1. Item registration:

Free item type

1. Item registration:

(Free item is registered automatically.)

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0011 •1.00

1 PLU0012 •2.00

1 PLU0013 •3.00

Free item

Free item •0.00

4 ST •6.00

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

1 PLU0001 •1.00

1 PLU0002 •2.00

1 PLU0003 •3.00

DISCOUNT01 •0.12

PLU0003 •3.00

3 ST •5.88

R-157

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4-22. Time calculation

This function is used for time calculation (such as parking fee). Only PLU has this

capability. You should allocate the additional PLU program file (file-814).

And this function is only effective in the check tracking system.

Time calculation requires the following files:

PLU file

This file is used for registering item.

Unit price of this file is used for the first unit price.

Additional PLU program file

This file is used for time calculation. This file contains,

unit interval time “Interval (minutes)”, second time frame unit price “upper New Interval

Price”, number of unit interval time “upper Change Price After”,

third time frame unit price “lower New Interval Price”, number of unit interval time “lower

Change Price After”

and calculation method “Use Last Interval Price”.

Time calculation

There are two calculation methods.

• In case of setting “No” to “Use Last Interval Price”,

Total fee (case A) = @1 * TA/ Interval time

Total fee (case B) = @1 * TF/ Interval time +@2 * (TB - TF)/ Interval time

Total fee (case C)

= @1 * TF/ Interval time +@2 * TS - TF/ Interval time + @3 * (TC - TS - TF)/ Interval time

• In case of setting “Yes” to “Use Last Interval Price”,

Total fee (case A) = @1 * TA/ Interval time

Total fee (case B) = @2 * TB/ Interval time

Total fee (case C) = @3 * TC/ Interval time

Case A

Case B

Case C

TFTS

Unit price = @1Unit price = @2Unit price = @3

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Example of receipt image

CHECK No.1

2 PLU0001 •25.00

12:00 -> 13:50 —Time frame

R-158

Registration

4-23. Additional PLU character

This function replaces PLU descriptor or adds other descriptor for customer/ employee

convenience.

PLU file

This file is used for registering item.

Additional PLU character file

This file stores additional PLU character. This file contains,

random PLU code or PLU record number,

character to replace or add-on (maximum 10 kinds of add-on),

replace/ add-on selection program, additional character target device.

In case of replacing PLU character:

PLU file character: “Beef Steak”

Additional PLU character: “Bifteck du boeuf”

“Bifteck du boeuf” is printed.

In case of adding on PLU character:

PLU file character: “Beef Steak”

Additional PLU character 1: “Bifteck du boeuf”, character 2: “Rindfleischsteak”

Beef Steak

Bifteck du boeuf

Rindfleischsteak

are printed.

R-159

QT-6600 Reference Manual

5. Refund mode operation ....................................................................... R-158

5-1. Selecting REF or REG– mode .................................................................... R-158

R-160

Refund Mode

5. Refund mode operation

The general procedure for entering the REF or REG– mode is as follows.

5-1. Selecting REF or REG– mode

After sign on operation, press the <MODE> key and select the <RF> or <REG-> key to

turn that mode.

Refund registration or register minus (REG–) registration starts with this operation.

Note: Key operations are similar to that in the register mode.

To avoid miss-registration in the REF or REG– mode, return the mode to the former

one immediately.

REG

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

REG Mode

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

REFUND Mode

R-

01 10-10-01 12:34 000001

REG- Mode

R-161

QT-6600 Reference Manual

6. Read and reset operations .................................................................. R-160

6-1. The procedures of reading or resetting ....................................................... R-160

6-2. Report sample ............................................................................................ R-162

R-162

Read and Reset

6. Read and reset operations

By setting the mode to the X or Z, the contents of totalizers and counters are enabled to read.

The X mode allows report at any time during business hours. The Z mode is only performed

at the end of the business day, since it clears the data stored to the totalizers and counters.

6-1. The procedures of reading or resetting

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).

2. Press <MODE> and <X/Z> to assign X/Z report.

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the

guidances. The hierarchy of the X/Z menus are described

below.

Refer to page 110 of this manual for X/Z command.

X/Z

01 15-12-96 12:34 000000

X/Z Report

1.Daily X

2.Periodic(1) X

3.Periodic(2) X

4.Daily Z

5.Periodic(1) Z

6.Periodic(2) Z

7.Time&Attendance

0.00

R-163

QT-6600 Reference Manual

X/Z Report Daily X Batch Batch 1 ~ n: n = 1 ~ 10

Cashier/Clerk Individual

All clerk

Open Check Individual

Clerk

All

Only total (X only)

All Information (X only)

E-Journal E-Journal All

Date & Consecutive number (X only)

Reset only (Z only)

R-Journal All

Date & Consecutive number (X only)

Customer Account Customer (Daily X/Z only)

Customer Group

Scanning System Scan PLU All (Daily X/Z only)

Sales Report (Daily X only)

Stock Report (Daily X only)

Reorder Report (Daily X only)

Top 50 Amount (Daily X only)

Top 50 Quantity (Daily X only)

Zero Sales (Daily X only)

NFP scan PLU (Daily Z only)

Inactive Days Report (Daily X/Z only)

Scan Mix & Match (Daily X/Z only)

Others Individual key (Daily X/Z only)

Flash (Daily X only)

Fixed totalizer

Free Function

PLU

PLU stock (Daily X/Z only)

Sub Department

Department

Group

Hourly sales

Monthly sales

Table analysis

Void

Hourly product

Mix & Match

Simple Time & Attendance (Daily X/Z only)

IDC IDC (n) clear (Z only): n = 1 ~ 3

Periodic 1 X Batch Same as Daily X

Cashier/Clerk Same as Daily X

Customer Account Same as Daily X

Others Same as Daily X

Periodic 2 X Same as Periodic 1 X

Daily Z Same as Daily X

Periodic 1 Z Same as Periodic 1 X

Periodic 2 Z Same as Periodic 2 X

Time & Attendance Employee activity

Employee

Employee edit

Hourly Labor

R-164

Read and Reset

6-2. Report sample

Cashier / clerk report

Z 0001017 CASHIER/CLERK 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

01 ••••••••••••••••••••••••1

—Clerk name / Drawer No.

GROSS 35 •38.00

—Gross title / Counter / Totalizer

NET No 10 •38.00

—Net title / totalizer

CAID •35.00

—Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer —Manager report

CHID •3.00

—Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer

CKID •0.00

—Check in drawer title / Check in drawer

CRID •0.00

—Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer

CASH No 10 •35.00

—Cash key title / Counter / Totalizer

---------------------------------------

03 ••••••••••••••••••••••••1

GROSS 21 •45.00

NET No 5 •40.00

CAID •35.00

—Cashier report

CHID •3.00

CKID •0.00

CRID •0.00

CASH No 10 •35.00

---------------------------------------

10 ••••••••••••••••••••••••1

GROSS 10 •18.00

NET No 8 •18.00

CAID •15.00

—Clerk report

CHID •3.00

CKID •0.00

CRID •0.00

CASH No 5 •15.00

Individual key

Z 0001095

—Mode / Report code

CASH No 11 •38.00

—Function key descriptor / Counter / Totalizer

CHECK No 0 •0.00

CREDIT No 1 •12.00

ADD CHK No 0

----------------------------------------

TL 12 •50.00

—TL descriptor / Counter / Totalizer

Flash

X 0000071 FLASH

—Mode / Report code / Report title

NET No 11 •38.00

—Net sales title / Counter /Totalizer

CAID •35.00

—Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer

CHID •0.00

—Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer

CKID •0.00

—Check in drawer title / Check in drawer

CRID •0.00

—Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer

R-165

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Fixed totalizer

Z 0001011 FIXED TTL 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROSS 35 •38.00

—Gross sales title / Counter / Totalizer

NET No 11 •38.00

—Net sales title / Counter / Totalizer

CAID •35.00

—

Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer

CHID •0.00

—Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer

CKID •0.00

—Check in drawer title / Check in drawer

CRID •0.00

—Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer

RF No 2 •8.00 —

Refund mode descriptor / Counter / Totalizer

COVER CT 2

—Customer count descriptor / Counter

TA1 •0.00

—Taxable amount 1 descriptor / Taxable amount 1

TX1 •0.00

—Tax 1 descriptor / Tax 1 amount

EX1 •0.00

—Tax exempt 1 descriptor / Tax exempt amount 1

TA2 •0.00

EX9 •0.00

TA10 •0.00

—Taxable amount 10 descriptor / Taxable amount 10

TX10 •0.00

—Tax 10 descriptor / Tax 10 amount

EX10 •0.00

—Tax exempt 10 descriptor / Tax exempt amount 10

GT1 •1236901437.04

—Grand total 1 descriptor / Grand total 1

GT2 •1569567830.40

—Grand total 2 descriptor / Grand total 2

GT3 •1325670420.24

—Grand total 3 descriptor / Grand total 3

000001--->001279

—Consecutive No. range

Free function

Z 0001012 FREE FUNCTION 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

CASH No 11 •38.00

—Transaction key descriptor / Counter / Amount

RC No 2 •8.00

PD No 1 •1.00

PLU

Z 0001014 PLU 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU0001 11.2 50 •682.55

—PLU descriptor / Weight * / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

HOUSE BON QTY 12

—House Bon quantity (always “0” skipped)

#0001 68.25%

—PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 •32.00

HOUSE BON -5.00

* If weight is “0”, no weight field is printed.

#0100 3.2%

---------------------------------------

TL 11.2 75 •714.55

DISCOUNT -6.00

HOUSE BON QTY 12

71.45%

PLU (with shift PLU)

Z 0001014 PLU 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU0001 50 •682.55

—PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT •1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

HOUSE BON QTY 12

—House Bon quantity (can be skipped)

#0001 68.25%

—PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

@1 1 •1.23

—1st unit price descriptor / Counter / Amount

@2 2 •2.50

•6.37

PLU0002 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT •5.00

R-166

Read and Reset

PLU (by range)

X 0010074 PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

#0001-#0002

—PLU range

PLU0001 50 •682.55

—PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

HOUSE BON QTY 12

—House Bon quantity (can be skipped)

#0001 68.25%

—PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25

•32.00

DISCOUNT -5.00

HOUSE BON QTY 10

#0002 3.2%

----------------------------------------

TL 75 •714.55

DISCOUNT -6.00

HOUSE BON QTY 22

71.45%

PLU (by group / dept / subdept)

X 1000014 PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP01 •••••••••••••••••01

—Group (dept / subdept) title

PLU0001 50 •682.55

—PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

#0001 68.25%

—PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -5.00

#0002 3.2%

----------------------------------------

TL 75 •714.55

—Total by group (dept / subdept) / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -6.00

71.45%

GROUP02 •••••••••••••••02

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••00

PLU0005 1 •2.00

—Non Group (dept / subdept) link items

DISCOUNT •0.00

#0005 0.2%

---------------------------------------

TL 1 •2.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

0.2%

PLU (by order character)

X 4000014 PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

ORDER01 •••••••••••••••••01

—Order title

PLU0001 50 •682.55

—PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

#0001 68.25%

—PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -5.00

#0002 3.2%

----------------------------------------

TL 75 •714.55

—Total by order / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -6.00

71.45%

ORDER02 •••••••••••••••••02

PLU0005 1 •2.00

—Non order character link item

DISCOUNT •0.00

#0005 0.2%

----------------------------------------

TL 1

•2.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

0.2%

R-167

QT-6600 Reference Manual

PLU zero sales

X 0100014 PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title

PLU0001 0 •0.00

—PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT •0.00

#0001

—PLU No. (can be skipped)

PLU0002 0 •0.00

---------------------------------------

TL 0 •0.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

PLU zero sales (by group / dept / subdept / order)

X 1100014 PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title

GROUP01 ••••••••••••••••01

—Group (dept / subdept / order character) title

PLU0001 0 •0.00

—PLU descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT •0.00

#0001

—PLU No. (can be skipped)

PLU0002 0 •0.00

GROUP02 ••••••••••••••••02

----------------------------------------

TL 0 •0.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

----------------------------------------

TL 0 •0.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

PLU stock / PLU less stock

X 0000064 PLU STOCK

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU0001 10 123.45

—PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock

#0001

—PLU No. (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 * 20

—* short stock

#0002

PLU stock (by range)

X 0010064 PLU STOCK

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

#0001-#0002

—Range

PLU0001 10 123.45

—PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock

#0001

—PLU No. (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 * 20

—* short stock

#0002

R-168

Read and Reset

PLU stock (by group / dept / subdept / order)

X 1000064 PLU STOCK

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP01 •••••••••••••••••01

—Link group (dept / subdept / order) title

PLU0001 10 123.45

—PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock

#0001

—PLU No. (can be skipped)

PLU0002 25 * 20

—* short stock

#0002

Subdepartment (all)

Z 0001013 SUB DEPT 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

SUBDEPT01 24 •82.55

—Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

SUBDEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 151 •156.55

DISCOUNT -3.00

100.00%

Subdepartment (by range)

X 0010013 SUB DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

#0001-#0002

—Range

SUBDEPT01 24 •82.55

—Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

SUBDEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 49 •114.55

DISCOUNT -3.00

98.27%

Subdepartment (by group / dept)

X 100013 SUB DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP01 •••••••••••••••••01

—Group title

SUBDEPT01 24 •82.55

—Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT •1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

SUBDEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT •2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 49 •114.55

DISCOUNT •3.00

98.27%

SUBDEPT04 1 •1.00

—No group link items

DISCOUNT •0.00

0.87%

----------------------------------------

TL 1 •1.00

DISCOUNT •0.00

0.87%

R-169

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Department (all)

X 0000015 DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

DEPT01 24 •82.55

—Department descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

DEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 151 •156.55

DISCOUNT -3.00

100.00%

Department (by range)

X 0010015 DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

#0001-#0002

—Range

DEPT01 24 •82.55

—Department descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

DEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 49 •114.55

DISCOUNT -3.00

98.27%

Department (by group)

X 1000015 DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP01 •••••••••••••••••01

—Group title

DEPT01 24 •82.55

—Department descriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.00

—Discount total (can be skipped)

70.82%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

DEPT02 25 •32.00

DISCOUNT -2.00

27.45%

----------------------------------------

TL 49 •114.55

DISCOUNT -3.00

98.27%

DEPT04 1 •1.00

—No group link items

DISCOUNT -0.00

0.87%

----------------------------------------

TL 1 •1.00

DISCOUNT -0.00

0.87%

Department (stock)

X 0000015 DEPT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

DEPT01 6 •163.54

—Department descriptor / Counter / Amount

Stock -10

—Stock title / Actual stock

DEPT02 2 •2.55

Stock -12.234

----------------------------------------

TL 8 •166.09

In case of the discount field treats as stock field.

Stock -22.234

R-170

Read and Reset

Group

X 0000016 GROUP

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP01 6 •163.54

—Group descriptor / Counter / Amount

1.63%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

GROUP02 2 •2.55

0.02%

----------------------------------------

TL 8 •166.09

1.65%

Hourly sales

Z 0001019 HOURLY 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

09:00->10:00 1 •63.54

—Time frame / Net counter / Net amount

1.63% CT 1 •63.54

—Sales ratio (can be skipped) / Customer counter / MDST amount

10:00->11:00 2 •122.55

3.52%

CT 2 •122.55

Monthly sales

Z 0001020 MONTHLY 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

......

—Day of the month

GROSS 52 •680.57

—Gross counter / Gross amount

NET No 12 •680.50

—Net counter / Net amount

......

GROSS 78 •1,034.59

NET No 37 •1,034.57

----------------------------------------

GROSS 130 •1,715.16

•13.19

—Average gross sales

NET 49 •1,715.07

•35.00

—Average net sales

Table analysis

Z 0001028 TABLE ANALYSIS 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

TBL0001 CT 12 •680.57

—Table No. / Customer count / Net amount

AVRG •56.71

—Average sales per customer

50.12%

—Sales ratio (can be skipped)

TBL0002 CT 5 •279.56

AVRG •55.91

10.04%

----------------------------------------

TL CT 28 •1,267.97

AVRG •45.28

60.16%

Void reason

Z 0001022 VOID REASON 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

OPE ERR No 12 •80.50

—Void reason / Counter / Amount

OUT OF DATE No 10 •40.42

No 0 •0.00

R-171

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Open check

X 0050025 OPEN CHK

—Mode / Report code / Report title

MC #01

—Machine No.

REG

01 07-01-2005 12:34 001029

—Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.

CHECK No.

001245

12CT #000121

—Check No. / Cover No. / Table No.

•100.35

—Subtotal amount (temporary closed by NB)

MC #02

REG

04 07-01-2005 14:31 001186

CHECK No.

001328

2CT #000226

BUSY

•130.45

—Busy status

MC #01

REG

04 07-01-2005 14:35 001686

CHECK NO.

002222

2CT #000226

FINALIZED

•1.00

—Finalized status

MC #01

REG

04 07-01-2005 14:45 001886

CHECK No.

1CT #000326

CUSTOMER MR.DEAL,GLEN

—Customer descriptor / entered customer name

•1.00

—Dummy check

CHECK No.

003333

NEW OPEN

•0.00

—Newly opened status

----------------------------------------

TL No 4 •360.80

Electronic journal (E-journal)

Z 0001058 JOURNAL

—Mode / Report code / Report title

MC #03

REG

01 07-11-2005 16:34 001029

1 PLU0055 •100.00

0.12%

%- -0.12

—Registrations

•99.88

CASH •99.88

MC #03

01 07-11-2005 16:35 001030

—Some program are made in Program 1 mode.

MC #03

X/Z

01 07-11-2005 16:37 001031

X 0100015 DEPT

—Report issued

Electronic journal (R-journal)

Z 0001060 JOURNAL

—Mode / Report code / Report title

(Same format as E-Journal)

Employee activity

X 0000029 EMPLOYEE

— Mode / Report title / Report code

#000001 HARRISON 1111111111

— Employee No. / Employee character / Social Security No.

#000002 BAKER 2222222222

#000003 PEABODY 3333333333

#000004 JOHNSON 4444444444

R-172

Read and Reset

Employee report (daily)

X 000029 EMPLOYEE

—

Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

#123456 HARRISON 123456789

— Employee No. / Employee character / Social Security No.

Monday 12-20-03

— Day of the week / Date

IN OUT BRK JOB# TIP WORK

08:00-10:00 00:15 12 •12.34 01:45

— Shift 1: Clock-in / Clock-out / Break / Job code / Tip / Work time

12:00-**:** 00:10 01 •0.00 **:**

— Shift 2: Clock-out shift *1

**:**-**:**

— Shift 3: Clock-in shift *2

----------------------------------------

TL 00:25 •12.34 **:**

— Break total / Tip total / Work time total *3

JOB# 12 01:45

—

Job summary / Job code / Work time *4

JOB# 1 **:**

— Job summary *5

REGULAR TIME 00:45

— Regular work hours *6

OVER TIME 00:17

— Overtime work hours *6

TL 01:12 •5.45

— Total of work hours *6 / Pay

*1 If employee is not clocked-out the shift, then “**:**” is printed on OUT & WORK.

*2 If employee is not clocked-in the shift, then “**:**-**:**” is printed on IN&OUT.

*3 If employee is not clocked-out the shift yet, then “**:**” is printed on WORK.

*4 JOB summary is printed in order to clock-in the shift.

If there is the same JOB code, then it will add to the JOB that was found before.

*5 If employee is not clocked-out the shift, then “**:**” is printed. No JOB # is printed, if

employee is not clocked-in the shift.

*6 You can select HH:MM format or HH.mm (print minutes in fraction) format.

Employee report (weekly / bi-weekly)

X 000129 EMPLOYEE

—

Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

#123456 HARRISON 123456789

Monday 12-21-03

— Day of the week / Date

IN OUT BRK JOB# TIP WORK

08:00-10:00 00:10 12 •12.34 01:45

— Shift 1

12:00-15:00 00:10 01 •0.00 02:50

— Shift 2

**:**-**:**

—Shift 3

----------------------------------------

TL 00:25 •12.34 04:35

Tuesday 12-22-03

IN OUT BRK JOB# TIP WORK

08:00-10:00 00:10 12 •12.34 01:45

12:00-15:00 00:10 01 •0.00 02:50

**:**-**:**

----------------------------------------

TL 00:25 •12.34 04:35

Sunday

IN OUT BRK JOB# TIP WORK

----------------------------------------

TL 00:00 •0.00 00:00

JOB# 12 01:45

— Job summary

JOB# 01 02:00

JOB# 05 02:00

JOB# 10 02:08

REGULAR TIME 00:45

— Regular work hours

OVER TIME 00:17

— Overtime work hours

TL 01:55 •2.04

— Total of work hours/ Pay

*1 If all shift in one day of the week is zero (no data), then that day of the week is not printed on

the report.

R-173

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Hourly item

Z 0001031 HOURLY PRODUCT 1234

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

09:00->09:30

— Time frame

GROSS 1357.956 •2,469.06

— Totalizer character / Counter / Amount

40%

NET No 12 •2,469.06

40%

— Sales ratio (Amount / Total amount of each time frame) (can be skipped)

PLU0001 1234.5 •1,234.50

20%

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

9.89% •6,172.62

— Sales ratio (Amount /Total amount of all time frame)/Total

09:30->10:00

Amount of this time frame

GROSS 1357.956 •2,469.06

40%

NET No 12 •2,469.06

40%

PLU0001 1234.5 •1,234.50

20%

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

19:30->20:00

GROSS 1357.956 •2,469.06

40%

NET No 12 •2,469.06

40%

PLU0001 1234.5 •1,234.50

20%

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

9.89% •6,172.62

TL •62,395.07

— Total Amount of all Time frame

Hourly labor report

Z 0001024 HOURLY LABOR 1234

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

09:00->09:30 No 2 •2,469.06

— Time frame / NET counter / NET Amount

82.62%

— NET ratio (can be skipped)

COST 00:05 •0.08

— Work time / Pay

— Pay ratio

NET SALES/HOUR •29,628.72

— Proceeds per work time

COST/TRANSACTION •0.04

— Wages per transaction

09:30->10:00 No 10

16:00->16:45 No 0

•0.00

COST 00:01 •0.00

NET SALES/HOUR •0.00

COST/TRANSACTION •0.00

IDC clear

Z 0001067 IDC(1) Clear 1

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

Normal End

—Result print

Customer group

X 0000052 CUSTOMER GP

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter

CUST GP01 No 1 •12.34

—Customer group 01 descriptor / Counter / Totalizer

CUST GP02 No 0 •0.00

R-174

Read and Reset

Customer open check (individual)

X 0020047 CUSTOMER

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUST No.

111111

—Customer number / * New customer

Mr.

—Customer title (Skip if nothing is set.)

John SMITH

—Customer’s name

BALANCE

•10.23

—Customer’s balance

DISCOUNT •1.23

—Discount total

FINALIZED GT

•316.36

—Finalized grand total

DISCOUNT GT •41.23

—Discount grand total

1-2-3 Hon-machi

—Address (1) (Skip if nothing is set.)

Shibuya-ku

—Address (2) (Skip if nothing is set.)

Tokyo JAPAN

—Address (3) (Skip if nothing is set.)

ZIP-123-4567

—Address (4) (Skip if nothing is set.)

PHONE No.012345678

—Telephone No. (Skip if nothing is set.)

Customer open check (all)

X 0000047 CUSTOMER

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUST No.

000001

—Customer number / * New customer

Mr.

—Customer title (Skip if nothing is set.)

Joseph McAfee

—Customer’s name

BALANCE

•10.23

—Customer’s balance

DISCOUNT •1.23

—Discount total

FINALIZED GT

•316.36

—Finalized grand total

DISCOUNT GT •41.23

—Discount grand total

--------------------------------------

BUSY

—Busy (Occupied) flag

CUST No.

000022

BALANCE

•110.23

DISCOUNT •1.23

FINALIZED GT

•616.36

DISCOUNT GT •41.23

--------------------------------------

TL No 2

—No. of customer

BALANCE •120.46

—Customer balance total

DISCOUNT •2.46

—Customer discount total

Customer open check (total only)

X 0040047 CUSTOMER

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

TL No 2

—No. of customer

BALANCE •120.46

—Customer balance total

DISCOUNT •2.46

—Customer discount total

Customer open check (all information)

X 0050047 CUSTOMER

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUST No.

000001

—Customer number / * New customer

Mr.

—Customer title (Skip if nothing is set.)

Joseph McAfee

—Customer’s name

BALANCE

•10.23

—Customer’s balance

DISCOUNT •1.23

—Discount total

FINALIZED GT

•316.36

—Finalized grand total

DISCOUNT GT •41.23

—Discount grand total

1-2-3 Hon-machi

—Address (1) (Skip if nothing is set.)

Shibuya-ku

—Address (2) (Skip if nothing is set.)

Tokyo JAPAN

—Address (3) (Skip if nothing is set.)

ZIP-123-4567

—Address (4) (Skip if nothing is set.)

PHONE No.012345678

—Telephone No. (Skip if nothing is set.)

--------------------------------------

BUSY

—Busy (Occupied) flag

CUST No.

000022

PHONE No.012345678

--------------------------------------

TL No 2

—No. of customer

BALANCE •120.46

—Customer balance total

DISCOUNT •2.46

—Customer discount total

R-175

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Mix and match

X 0000061 MIX&MATCH

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

Bundle A No 2 •10.46

—Discount total

#01234

—Coupon No.

Bundle B No 23 •120.46

#0111

---------------------------------------

TL No 25 •130.92

Scan Mix and match

X 0001066 MIX&MATCH

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

DISCOUNT No 2 •10.46

—Discount total

FREE ORDER No 23 •120.46

---------------------------------------

TL No 25 •130.92

Simple time and attendance

X 0001023 TIME ATTENDANCE

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

EMPLOYEE NO. 000123

—Emplyee number

15.01-15.01 11:59-14:29 END OF SHIFT

—Day, Time (Clock-in to clock-out) / Clock-out reason

15.02-15.02 18:00-20:05 UNWEL

---------------------------------------

WHOLE TIME 04:35

EMPLOYEE NO. 000999

---------------------------------------

WHOLE TIME 00:00

Scanning PLU (with shift file)

Z 0001026 SCANNING PLU 123

—Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

#49177008

—OBR code

ERASER 1 •1.00

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

#4901351036723

—OBR code

CANDY 123.012 •123.45

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

2nd Price 12 •12.00

—2nd price decriptor / Counter / Amount

7th Price 1 •5.00

—7th price decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -2.50

—Discount amount

NFP Scan PLU

—NFP title (In case of registering Not found PLU)

—Clerk who register NFP

#4902102037549

—OBR code

DEPT01 2 •2.00

—Link department decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -0.20

---------------------------------------

TL 1234.563 •130.92

—Total (counter / totalizer)

DISCOUNT -10.98

—Total (discount)

@1 22 •20.93

—Total (counter / totalizer for 1st shift item)

@7 •19.29

TOTAL ITEMS: 0001234/ 100000

—Items / Allocated records

R-176

Read and Reset

Scanning PLU sales (by group / department / subdepartment)

X 0010026 SALES REPORT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#0001-0010

—Range (group / department / subdepartment)

DEPT01

—Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

#4911177008

—OBR code

ERASER 1 •1.00

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

#4901351036723

—OBR code (for 2nd shift)

CANDY 123.012 •123.45

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -2.50

—Discount amount

---------------------------------------

TL 1234.563 •130.92

—Department 1 total (counter / totalizer)

DISCOUNT -10.98

—Total (discount)

@1 22 •20.93

—Total (counter / totalizer for 1st shift item)

@7 •19.29

DEPT02

#4902102037549

OOLONG TEA 5 •5.00

DISCOUNT -1.00

---------------------------------------

TL 34 •13.92

—Department 2 total

DISCOUNT -1.00

@1 2 •2.93

@7 •1.40

---------------------------------------

TL 34 •13.92

—Total

DISCOUNT -1.00

@1 2 •2.93

@7 •1.40

TOTAL ITEMS: 0001234/ 100000

—Items / Allocated records

Scanning PLU stock (by group / department / subdepartment)

X 0020026 STOCK REPORT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#0001-0010

—Range (group / department / subdepartment)

DEPT01

—Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

#4911177008

—OBR code

ERASER 100

—Item decriptor / Actual stock

#4901351036723

—OBR code (for 2nd shift)

CANDY -3.452

—Item decriptor / Actual stock

DEPT02

#4902102037549

OOLONG TEA 50

Scanning PLU out of stock (by group / department / subdepartment)

X 0030026 REORDER REPORT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#0001-0010

—Range (group / department / subdepartment)

DEPT01

—Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

#4911177008

—OBR code

ERASER 0

—Item decriptor / Actual stock

#4901351036723

—OBR code (for 2nd shift)

CANDY -3.452

—Item decriptor / Actual stock

DEPT02

#4902102037549

Print items, if the stock value is less than or equal to the actual stock level which is entered before

OOLONG TEA 10

issuing this report.

R-177

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Scanning PLU Top 50 amount

X 0040026 TOP 50 AMOUNT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#4901351036723

—OBR code

CANDY 123.012 •123.45

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -2.50

—Discount amount

#4911177008

ERASER 1 •1.00

---------------------------------------

TL 1234.563 •130.92

—Total

DISCOUNT -10.98

@1 22 •20.93

@7 •19.29

Scanning PLU Top 50 quantity

X 0050026 TOP 50 QUANTITY

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#4901351036723

—OBR code

CANDY 123.012 •123.45

—Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -2.50

—Discount amount

#4911177008

ERASER 1 •1.00

---------------------------------------

TL 1234.563 •130.92

—Total

DISCOUNT -10.98

@1 22 •20.93

@7 •19.29

Scanning PLU zero sales (by group / department / subdepartment)

X 0060026 ZERO SALES

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#0001-0010

—Range (group / department / subdepartment)

DEPT01

—Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

#4911177008

—OBR code

ERASER 28-02-2008

—Item decriptor / Last update date

#4901351036723

CANDY 01-03-2008

DEPT02

#4902102037549

OOLONG TEA 12-03-2008

Scanning PLU inactive (by group / department / subdepartment)

X 0070026 INACTIVE DAYS REPORT

—Mode / Report code / Report title

#0001-0010

—Range (group / department / subdepartment)

DEPT01

—Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

#4911177008

—OBR code

ERASER 28-02-2008

—Item decriptor / Last update date

#4901351036723

CANDY 01-03-2008

DEPT02

#4902102037549

OOLONG TEA 12-03-2008

R-178

Read and Reset

Not found PLU

X 0010027 NOT FOUND PLU

—Mode / Report code / Report title

C01

—Clerk

#4911177008

—OBR code

DEPT01 5 •5.00

—Link department decriptor / Counter / Amount

DISCOUNT -1.98

—Discount total

—Barcode

4911177008

#4901351036723

DEPT01 5 •10.00

DISCOUNT -1.77

4901351036723

R-179

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-1. Function key list .................................................................................. R-178

R-180

Function key list

A-1. Function key list

Function Code Initial character

Add check 094

Arrangement 044

Bill copy 047

Break-in / out 109

Cancel 236

Cash amount tendered 001

Charge 002

Check endorsement 039

Check print 012

Check tender 003

Clerk number 072

Clerk transfer 013

Clock-in / out 108

Coupon 023

Coupon 2 036

Coupon number 110

Credit 004

Cube 090

Currency exchange 045

Customer number 148

Declaration 061

Department 051

Department number 135

Deposit 025

Discount 028

Display mode 219

Eat-in 128

EBT tender 007

Electronic journal display 207

Error correct / Void 034

First unit price 069

Flat PLU 063

Food stamp status shift 059

Food stamp subtotal 081

Food stamp tender 005

Function list 253

House Bon 114

Item search 246

Ketten Bon 113

List 136

List number 137

Loan 019

Location change 260

Lock out unused key 000

Media change 118

Menu shift 064

Merchandise subtotal 080

Minus 027

Multiplication 082

New balance 006

New check 091

New / Old check 093

NLU (number look up) 138

Normal receipt 016

No sale 042

Non-add 040

Non-add / No sale 041

Not found PLU 142

Number of customer 043

OBR 103

Old check 092

Open 067

Open2 068

Open check 117

Operator number 078

Operator read / reset 073

Order character change 252

Paid out 021

ADD CHK

ARG

BILL

BREAK-IN/OUT

CANCEL

CASH

CHARGE

CK.E

CHKP

CHECK

CLK#

CLK TRANS

CLOCK-IN/OUT

COUPON

CPN2

COUPON#

CREDIT

XXX

CUST#

DECLA

DEPT nn

DEPT#

DEPOSIT

%–

DISP MODE

EAT-IN

EBTTD

EJ DISP

VOID

1st@

PLU nnn

F/S

FSST

FSTD

FUNCLIST

HOUSE BON

X/KETTEN

LIST

LIST#

LOAN

LOCATION

NOP

MEDIA CHG

MDST

–

NEW CHK

NEW/OLD

NLU

NRMRCT

#/NS

NFP

OBR

OLD CHK

OPEN

OPEN2

OPEN CHK

OPE#

OPE X/Z

ORDER CHAR

Function Code Initial character

Payment 149

Pick up 022

Plus 029

PLU 048

Post entry 115

Premium 030

Price 049

Price change 104

Price inquiry 008

Quantity / for 083

Recall 131

Receipt 038

Receipt on / off 076

Received on account 020

Refund 033

Room number 100

Room message 101

Round repeat 116

Scale 088

Seat number 119

Second unit price 070

Selective item subtotal 085

Separate check 095

Shift PLU 065

Slip back feed / release 054

Slip feed / release 056

Slip print 055

Split payment 140

Square 084

Stock inquiry 009

Store 130

Subdepartment 133

Subdepartment number 134

Substitution 111

Subtotal 075

Swipe 172

Table number 058

Table sharing 261

Table transfer 014

Takeout 129

Tare 087

Tax status shift 057

Taxable amount subtotal 077

Tax exempt 062

Text print 011

Text recall 010

Tray total 074

Tip 015

Validation 037

VAT 046

Worktime 237

System keys

Numeric key 000n201

Clear 202

Decimal point 098

Escape / Skip 211

Home position 218

Page down 220

Page up 221

Mode 124

Two zero 096

Yes 212

No 213

Left arrow 214

Right arrow 215

Up arrow 216

Down arrow 217

End 222

PAYMENT

P.UP

PLU#

POST ENTRY

PRC

PRICE CHANGE

PRCINQ

RECALL

RCT

RCT ON/OFF

ROOM#

ROOM MSG

ROUND REPEAT

SCALE

SEAT#

2nd@

SIST

SEP CHK

SFT PLU

SB/R

SF/R

SLIP

SPLIT PAYMENT

STKINQ

STORE

SUBDEPT nn

SDPT#

SUBST.

SUBTOTAL

SWIPE

TBL#

TBL SHARE

TBL TRANS

TAKE-OUT

TARE

T/S

TAST

EXEMPT

PRT

CHAR

TRAY TTL

TIP

VLD

VAT

WORKTIME

n=1~9, “0”=10

HOME

PAGE DOWN

PAGE UP

MODE

R-181

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2. File format .................................................................................. R-183

A-2-1. Fixed totalizer file...................................................................... R-183

A-2-1-1 Fixed totalizer (daily) ................................................................................ R-183

A-2-1-2 Fixed totalizer (periodic/consolidation) ..................................................... R-183

A-2-2. Transaction key file ................................................................... R-184

A-2-2-1 Transaction key (daily) .............................................................................. R-184

A-2-2-2 Transaction key (periodic/consolidation)................................................... R-184

A-2-3. Subdepartment file ................................................................... R-184

A-2-3-1 Subdepartment (daily) .............................................................................. R-184

A-2-3-2 Subdepartment (periodic/consolidation) ................................................... R-184

A-2-4. PLU file....................................................................................... R-185

A-2-4-1 PLU (daily)................................................................................................ R-185

A-2-4-2 PLU (periodic/consolidation) .................................................................... R-185

A-2-4-3 PLU 2nd@ ................................................................................................ R-185

A-2-4-4 Shift PLU (daily) ....................................................................................... R-186

A-2-4-5 Shift PLU (periodic/consolidation) ............................................................ R-186

A-2-5. Scanning PLU file ..................................................................... R-187

A-2-5-1 Scanning PLU .......................................................................................... R-187

A-2-5-2 Scanning PLU shift ................................................................................... R-187

A-2-5-3 Scan Mix & match (daily).......................................................................... R-187

A-2-5-4 Scan Mix & match (periodic/consolidation) .............................................. R-187

A-2-5-5 Batch maintenance................................................................................... R-188

A-2-5-6 Multi EAN link ........................................................................................... R-188

A-2-5-7 Non PLU table .......................................................................................... R-188

A-2-5-8 NLU table ................................................................................................. R-188

A-2-6. Department file .......................................................................... R-189

A-2-6-1 Department (daily) .................................................................................... R-189

A-2-6-2 Department (periodic/consolidation) ........................................................ R-189

A-2-7. Group file ................................................................................... R-190

A-2-7-1 Group (daily)............................................................................................. R-190

A-2-7-2 Group (periodic/consolidation) ................................................................. R-190

A-2-8. Clerk file ..................................................................................... R-191

A-2-8-1 Clerk (programming) ................................................................................ R-191

A-2-8-2 Clerk detail (daily, periodic / consolidation) .............................................. R-192

A-2-8-3 Clerk detail link ......................................................................................... R-192

A-2-8-4 Clerk (i-Button) key ID .............................................................................. R-192

A-2-9. Hourly sales file ........................................................................ R-193

A-2-9-1 Hourly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation) .............................................. R-193

A-2-10. Monthly sales file ...................................................................... R-193

A-2-10-1 Monthly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation) ............................................ R-193

A-2-11. Hourly item file .......................................................................... R-194

A-2-11-1 Hourly item ............................................................................................... R-194

A-2-11-2 Hourly item link (Hourly production link) ................................................... R-194

A-2-12. Mix and match file ..................................................................... R-195

A-2-12-1 Mix and match (daily) ............................................................................... R-195

A-2-12-2 Mix and match (periodic/consolidation) .................................................... R-195

A-2-13. IDC file........................................................................................ R-196

A-2-13-1 IDC file (1) ................................................................................................ R-196

R-182

File Format

A-2-13-2 IDC file (2) ................................................................................................ R-196

A-2-13-3 IDC file (3) ................................................................................................ R-196

A-2-13-4 IDC link ..................................................................................................... R-196

A-2-14. Time & Attendance file ............................................................. R-197

A-2-14-1 Hourly / Labor ........................................................................................... R-197

A-2-14-2. Work time file ............................................................................................ R-197

A-2-14-3. Time zone file ........................................................................................... R-198

A-2-14-4. Employee file ............................................................................................ R-198

A-2-14-5. Job code file ............................................................................................. R-198

A-2-14-6. Schedule file ............................................................................................. R-199

A-2-14-7. Simple time and attendance file ............................................................... R-199

A-2-14-8. Clock-out reason file................................................................................. R-199

A-2-15. Void table file ............................................................................. R-200

A-2-15-1 Void table (daily) ....................................................................................... R-200

A-2-15-2 Void table (periodic/consolidation) ............................................................ R-200

A-2-16. Table analysis file...................................................................... R-200

A-2-16-1 Table analysis (daily) ................................................................................ R-200

A-2-16-2 Table analysis (periodic/consolidation) ..................................................... R-200

A-2-17. Grand total file........................................................................... R-201

A-2-17-1 Grand total (daily) ..................................................................................... R-201

A-2-17-2 Grand total (periodic/consolidation).......................................................... R-201

A-2-18. Customer file ............................................................................. R-202

A-2-18-1 Customer file ............................................................................................ R-202

A-2-18-2 Customer group file (daily) ....................................................................... R-202

A-2-18-3 Customer group (periodic/consolidation).................................................. R-202

A-2-18-3 Customer title ........................................................................................... R-202

A-2-19. General control file ................................................................... R-203

A-2-19-1 General control ......................................................................................... R-203

A-2-20. Special character file ................................................................ R-204

A-2-20-1 Special character...................................................................................... R-204

A-2-21. Report header file ..................................................................... R-204

A-2-20-1 Report header .......................................................................................... R-204

A-2-22. Tax table file............................................................................... R-204

A-2-19-1 Tax table ................................................................................................... R-204

A-2-23. Pulldown group file ................................................................... R-205

A-2-23-1 Pulldown group ......................................................................................... R-205

A-2-24. Set menu table file .................................................................... R-205

A-2-24-1 Set menu table ......................................................................................... R-205

A-2-25. Batch X/Z file ............................................................................. R-206

A-2-25-1 Batch X/Z.................................................................................................. R-206

A-2-26. Receipt / Slip message file ....................................................... R-206

A-2-26-1 Receipt / Slip message............................................................................. R-206

A-2-27. Check endorsement message file ........................................... R-206

A-2-27-1 Check endorsement message .................................................................. R-206

A-2-28. Arrangement file ....................................................................... R-207

A-2-28-1 Arrangement group (1) ~ (5)..................................................................... R-207

A-2-29. Character recall file................................................................... R-207

A-2-29-1 Character recall ........................................................................................ R-207

R-183

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-30. Check print file .......................................................................... R-207

A-2-30-1 Check print ............................................................................................... R-207

A-2-31. Graphic logo file........................................................................ R-207

A-2-31-1 Graphic logo (external printer) .................................................................. R-207

A-2-32. Scheduler file ............................................................................ R-208

A-2-32-1 Scheduler ................................................................................................. R-208

A-2-33. Order character file ................................................................... R-208

A-2-33-1 Order character ........................................................................................ R-208

A-2-34. Euro program file ...................................................................... R-208

A-2-34-1 Euro program file ...................................................................................... R-208

A-2-35. Character conversion for CF file.............................................. R-208

A-2-35-1 Character conversion for CF file ............................................................... R-208

A-2-36. Check# pop-up window definition file..................................... R-209

A-2-36-1 Check# pop-up window definition file ....................................................... R-209

A-2-37. Clerk pop-up window definition file ........................................ R-209

A-2-37-1 Clerk pop-up window definition file ........................................................... R-209

A-2-38. Sound file................................................................................... R-209

A-2-38-1 Sound (1) ~ (10) file.................................................................................. R-209

A-2-39. Add on VMP file ......................................................................... R-210

A-2-39-1 Add on VMP file ........................................................................................ R-210

A-2-40. Intelligent EJ file ....................................................................... R-210

A-2-40-1 Intelligent EJ file ....................................................................................... R-210

A-2-41. Menu title character file ............................................................ R-210

A-2-41-1 Menu title character file ............................................................................ R-210

A-2-42. Tare table file ............................................................................. R-210

A-2-42-1 Tare table file ............................................................................................ R-210

A-2-43. Screen logo file ......................................................................... R-211

A-2-43-1 Screen logo file ......................................................................................... R-211

A-2-45. Additional PLU program file..................................................... R-211

A-2-45-1 Additional PLU program file ...................................................................... R-211

A-2-46. External device serial number file ........................................... R-211

A-2-46-1 External device serial number file ............................................................ R-211

A-2-44. Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file .................................... R-211

A-2-44-1 Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file ..................................................... R-211

A-2-48. Free function list file ................................................................. R-212

A-2-48-1 Free function list file.................................................................................. R-212

A-2-47. Additional PLU character file ................................................... R-212

A-2-47-1 Additional PLU character file .................................................................... R-212

A-2-49. System files ............................................................................... R-213

A-2-49-1 Key table ................................................................................................... R-213

A-2-49-2 Touch screen key table ............................................................................. R-213

A-2-49-3 System connection table .......................................................................... R-213

A-2-49-4 I/O parameter table................................................................................... R-214

A-2-49-5 Printer connection table............................................................................ R-214

A-2-49-6 System error log ....................................................................................... R-214

A-2-49-7 Auto program control ................................................................................ R-214

A-2-49-8 LCD color control ...................................................................................... R-214

R-184

File Format

A-2-49-9 Keyboard color definition .......................................................................... R-215

A-2-49-10 Keyboard color theme .............................................................................. R-215

A-2-49-11 Keyboard bitmap image............................................................................ R-215

A-2-49-12 TCP/IP control .......................................................................................... R-216

A-2-49-14 FTP Login Name ...................................................................................... R-216

A-2-49-15 FTP Server Name .................................................................................... R-216

A-2-49-16 FTP Trans file ........................................................................................... R-216

A-2-49-17 Character key table file ............................................................................. R-216

A-2-49-18 PS2 key table file ...................................................................................... R-217

A-2-49-19 Key table (full screen) file ......................................................................... R-217

R-185

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2. File format

A-2-1. Fixed totalizer file

A-2-1-1 Fixed totalizer (daily)

File name: Fixed totalizer (daily) File No.: 001 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

A-2-1-2 Fixed totalizer (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Fixed totalizer (periodic 1) File No.: 101 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File name: Fixed totalizer (periodic 2) File No.: 201 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File name: Fixed totalizer (daily consolidation) File No.: 301 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File name: Fixed totalizer (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 401 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File name: Fixed totalizer (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 501 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File name: Fixed totalizer (consolidation work) File No.: 601 Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

Character Counter Totalizer

0162126

Counter Totalizer

0510

Rec No. Contents

001 Gross sales total

002 Net sales total

003 Cash in drawer

004 Cash declared amount

005 Declared short cash amount

006 Declared over cash amount

007 Charge in drawer

008 Charge declared amount

009 Declared short charge amount

010 Declared over charge amount

011 Check in drawer

012 Check declared amount

013 Declared short check amount

014 Declared over check amount

015 Credit in drawer

016 Credit declared amount

017 Declared short credit amount

018 Declared over credit amount

019 Food stamp in drawer

020 Food stamp cash change

021 EBT in drawer

022 EBT cash change

023 Refund mode total

024 Customer count

025 Average sales per customer

026 Check cashing service fee

027 New balance fee

028 future use

029 Clerk commission 1 total

030 Clerk commission 2 total

Rec No. Contents

031 Foreign currency cash in drawer 1

032 Foreign currency check in drawer 1

033 Foreign currency cash in drawer 2

034 Foreign currency check in drawer 2

035 Foreign currency cash in drawer 3

036 Foreign currency check in drawer 3

037 Reduction

038 Item return

039 Clear count

040 future use

041 Rounding

042 ST transfer void

043 Consecutive No. start (Philippine)

044 Consecutive No. end (Philippine)

045 Last GT 1 (Philippine)

046 Last GT 2 (Philippine)

047 Last GT 3 (Philippine)

048 future use

049 future use

050 Taxable amount 1

051 Tax 1

052 Tax exempt 1

053 Taxable amount 2

054 Tax 2

055 Tax exempt 2

056 Taxable amount 3

057 Tax 3

058 Tax exempt 3

059 Taxable amount 4

060 Tax 4

Rec No. Contents

061 Tax exempt 4

062 Taxable amount 5

063 Tax 5

064 Tax exempt 5

065 Taxable amount 6

066 Tax 6

067 Tax exempt 6

068 Taxable amount 7

069 Tax 7

070 Tax exempt 7

071 Taxable amount 8

072 Tax 8

073 Tax exempt 8

074 Taxable amount 9

075 Tax 9

076 Tax exempt 9

077 Taxable amount 10

078 Tax 10

079 Tax exempt 10

080 Euro cash in drawer

081 Euro charge in drawer

082 Euro check in drawer

083 Euro credit in drawer

084 Coupon total

085 Money declaration count

R-186

File Format

A-2-2. Transaction key file

A-2-2-1 Transaction key (daily)

File name: Transaction key (daily) File No.: 002 Max. allocatable records: 999

A-2-2-2 Transaction key (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Transaction key (periodic 1) File No.: 102 Max. allocatable records: 999

File name: Transaction key (periodic 2) File No.: 202 Max. allocatable records: 999

File name: Transaction key (daily consolidation) File No.: 302 Max. allocatable records: 999

File name: Transaction key (periodic 1 consolidation)

File No.: 402 Max. allocatable records: 999

File name: Transaction key (periodic 2 consolidation)

File No.: 502 Max. allocatable records: 999

File name: Transaction key (consolidation work) File No.: 602 Max. allocatable records: 999

A-2-3. Subdepartment file

A-2-3-1 Subdepartment (daily)

File name: Subdepartment (daily) File No.: 003 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-3-2 Subdepartment (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Subdepartment (periodic 1) File No.: 103 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Subdepartment (periodic 2) File No.: 203 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Subdepartment (daily consolidation) File No.: 303 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Subdepartment (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 403 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Subdepartment (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 503 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Subdepartment (consolidation work) File No.: 603 Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

0510

Character Counter Totalizer

0182832

Function code

Program @/Rate

2 37 42

Character Counter Totalizer

0162629

Double Bon

Color link

Program @

HALO

Link

Order char. link

Order

Pull-

down

Group

link

Discount

totalizer

53 58 63

Counter Totalizer

10 15

Discount

totalizer

R-187

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-4. PLU file

A-2-4-1 PLU (daily)

File name: PLU File No.: 004 Max. allocatable records: 9999

A-2-4-2 PLU (periodic/consolidation)

File name: PLU (periodic 1) File No.: 104 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: PLU (periodic 2) File No.: 204 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: PLU (daily consolidation) File No.: 304 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: PLU (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 404 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: PLU (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 504 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: PLU (consolidation work) File No.: 604 Max. allocatable records: 9999

Counter Totalizer

10 15

Discount

totalizer Weight

20 25

House

Bon

quantity

Stock

quantity

Character

02434

Program 2nd@ 2nd

Q'ty

Not

used

Not used

Link

46 4943

Unit

stock

A-2-4-3 PLU 2nd@

File name: PLU 2nd@ File No.: 054 Max. allocatable records: 9999

Character

HALO

0243437

Program

Random

code

Unit stock

Minimum

stock

Set menu

link

Link

43 46

Counter Totalizer

Double Bon

6660

Order char. link

Order

Discount

totalizer

80 85

Stock

quantity Weight

House

Bon

quantity

Not

used

90 95

7570 100

Pull-

down

Group

link

R-188

File Format

A-2-4-4 Shift PLU (daily)

File name: Shift PLU File No.: 055 Max. allocatable records: 9999

A-2-4-5 Shift PLU (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Shift PLU (periodic 1) File No.: 155 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Shift PLU (periodic 2) File No.: 255 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Shift PLU (daily consolidation) File No.: 355 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Shift PLU (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 455 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Shift PLU (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 555 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Shift PLU (consolidation work) File No.: 655 Max. allocatable records: 9999

Unit price

shift 2

Unit price

shift 3

Unit price

shift 4

Unit price

shift 5

Unit price

shift 6

Unit price

shift 7

Unit price

shift 8

Link 2 ~ 8 PGM2 ~ 8 Counter

shift 2

Totalizer

shift 2

069

3151812 21 42 49 54 59

Counter

shift 3

Totalizer

shift 3

64 119

Counter

shift 4

Totalizer

shift 4

74 79

Counter

shift 5

Totalizer

shift 5

84 89

Counter

shift 6

Totalizer

shift 6

94 99

Counter

shift 7

Totalizer

shift 7

104

Totalizer

shift 8

114

109

Counter

shift 8

Counter

shift 2

Totalizer

shift 2

0105152025

Counter

shift 3

Totalizer

shift 3

Counter

shift 4

Totalizer

shift 4

45 50 55

Counter

shift 5

Totalizer

shift 5

Counter

shift 6

Totalizer

shift 6

Counter

shift 7

Totalizer

shift 7

Totalizer

shift 8

Counter

shift 8

R-189

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-5. Scanning PLU file

A-2-5-1 Scanning PLU

File name: Scanning PLU File No.: 016 Max. allocatable records: 100000

OBR code

Link @

not used

Mix & match

Clerk

Character PGM Counter Totalizer Discount

total

22 25 30 42 47 52 5333 36 37

A-2-5-2 Scanning PLU shift

File name: Scanning PLU shift file (1) ~ (6)

File No.: 116, 216, 316, 416, 516, 616 Max. allocatable records: 100000

PGM Link

not used

Mix & match

Counter Totalizer Discount

total

11 14 15 20 25 30

A-2-5-3 Scan Mix & match (daily)

File name: Scan Mix & match (daily) File No.: 056 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-5-4 Scan Mix & match (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Scan Mix & match (periodic 1) File No.: 156 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Scan Mix & match (periodic 2) File No.: 256 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Scan Mix & match (daily consolidation) File No.: 356 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Scan Mix & match (periodic 1 consolidation)

File No.: 456 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Scan Mix & match (periodic 2 consolidation)

File No.: 556 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Scan Mix & match (consolidation work) File No.: 656 Max. allocatable records: 99

Free item

OBR code

Amount/ rate

Work

Character PGM Counter Totalizer

1916 23 29 44 4939

Counter Totalizer

0510

R-190

File Format

A-2-5-5 Batch maintenance

File name: Batch maintenance file File No.: 070 Max. allocatable records: 1000

OBR code

Link @

not used

Price level

Mix & match

Status

Character PGM

23 26 31 3934 37 38

A-2-5-7 Non PLU table

File name: Non PLU table file File No.: 976 Max. allocatable records: 999

Program

A-2-5-8 NLU table

File name: NLU table file File No.: 077 Max. allocatable records: 999

OBR code

File-076

rec-#

126

A-2-5-6 Multi EAN link

File name: Multi EAN link file File No.: 075 Max. allocatable records: 100000

OBR code

Parent

Link item

item

126

R-191

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-6. Department file

A-2-6-1 Department (daily)

File name: Department (daily) File No.: 005 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-6-2 Department (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Department (periodic 1) File No.: 105 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Department (periodic 2) File No.: 205 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Department (daily consolidation) File No.: 305 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Department (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 405 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Department (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 505 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Department (consolidation work) File No.: 605 Max. allocatable records: 99

Character CounterTotalizer Discount

totalizer

0162629

Double Bon

Random code

Color link

Program @

HALO

32 35

Link

Order char. link

Order

Pull-

down

Group

link

50 56 61 66

Counter Totalizer

10 15

Discount

totalizer

The contents of each field for PLU, department, subdepartment and PLU 2nd@

Program field for PLU, department, subdepartment, PLU 2nd@

Refer to the “Elementary program” on page 199 of the programming manual.

Link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department, PLU 2nd@)

Refer to the “Field 11-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.

Random code field (for PLU, department)

Refer to the “Field 12-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.

Set menu link field (for PLU)

Refer to the “Field 13-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.

Unit/minimum stock field (for PLU, PLU 2nd@)

Refer to the “Field 14-066-1/-2” on page 201 of the programming manual.

HALO field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 15-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.

Order character link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 16-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.

Double Bon field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 17-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.

Order character link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 20-066” on page 202 of the programming manual.

Pulldown group field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 21-066” on page 203 of the programming manual.

Color link field (for subdepartment, department)

Refer to the “Field 22-066” on page 203 of the programming manual.

R-192

File Format

Counter Totalizer

0510

A-2-7. Group file

A-2-7-1 Group (daily)

File name: Group (daily) File No.: 006 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-7-2 Group (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Group (periodic 1) File No.: 106 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Group (periodic 2) File No.: 206 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Group (daily consolidation) File No.: 306 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Group (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 406 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Group (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 506 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Group (consolidation work) File No.: 606 Max. allocatable records: 99

Character Counter Totalizer

0162126

R-193

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-8. Clerk file

A-2-8-1 Clerk (programming)

File name: Clerk (programming) File No.: 007 Max. allocatable records: 99

Commission rate

Refer to the “Commission rate” on page 185 of the programming manual.

Table range

Refer to the “Table range” on page 185 of the programming manual.

Clerk control

Refer to the “Record 01-067” on page 186 of the programming manual.

Menu/@ control

Refer to the “Record 02-067” on page 187 of the programming manual.

Mode control

Refer to the “Record 03-067” on page 188 of the programming manual.

Function control 1

Refer to the “Record 04-067” on page 189 of the programming manual.

Function control 2

Refer to the “Record 05-067” on page 190 of the programming manual.

Function control 3

Refer to the “Record 06-067” on page 191 of the programming manual.

Function control 4

Refer to the “Record 07-067” on page 192 of the programming manual.

Function control 5

Refer to the “Record 08-067” on page 193 of the programming manual.

Arrangement control

Refer to the “Record 09-067” on page 194 of the programming manual.

Report control

Refer to the “Record 10-067” on page 195 of the programming manual.

Character

016

19 20

Clerk interrupt

check #

Commission

rate

Clerk

control

Table #

range

Menu/@

control

Mode

control

Function

control (1)

37 55

Drawer #

Clerk #

73 79 918567 97

Function

control (2)

Function

control (3)

Function

control (4)

Function

control (5)

Arrangement

control

Report

control not used

R-194

File Format

Record No.

File No.

024

A-2-8-2 Clerk detail (daily, periodic / consolidation)

File name: Clerk detail (daily) File No.: 011 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (periodic 1) File No.: 111 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (periodic 2) File No.: 211 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (daily consolidation) File No.: 311 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 411 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 511 Max. allocatable records: 9801

File name: Clerk detail (consolidation work) File No.: 611 Max. allocatable records: 9801

A-2-8-3 Clerk detail link

File name: Clerk detail link File No.: 030 Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

0510

A-2-8-4 Clerk (i-Button) key ID

File name: Clerk (i-Button) key ID File No.: 027 Max. allocatable records: 300

Program

i-Button key ID

character

01217

R-195

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-9. Hourly sales file

A-2-9-1 Hourly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation)

File name: Hourly sales (daily) File No.: 009 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (periodic 1) File No.: 109 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (periodic 2) File No.: 209 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (daily consolidation) File No.: 309 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 409 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 509 Max. allocatable records: 96

File name: Hourly sales (consolidation work) File No.: 609 Max. allocatable records: 96

A-2-10. Monthly sales file

A-2-10-1 Monthly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation)

File name: Monthly sales (daily) File No.: 010 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (periodic 1) File No.: 110 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (periodic 2) File No.: 210 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (daily consolidation) File No.: 310 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 410 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 510 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

File name: Monthly sales (consolidation work) File No.: 610 Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

Counter

(Net)

Totalizer

(Net)

10 15

No. of

customer

Merchandise

subtotal

Counter

(Gross)

Totalizer

(Gross)

Counter

(Net)

Totalizer

(Net)

10 15 20

R-196

File Format

A-2-11. Hourly item file

A-2-11-1 Hourly item

File name: Hourly Item (daily) File No.: 021 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (periodic 1) File No.: 121 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (periodic 2) File No.: 221 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (daily consolidation) File No.: 321 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 421 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 521 Max. allocatable records: 1920

File name: Hourly Item (consolidation work) File No.: 621 Max. allocatable records: 1920

A-2-11-2 Hourly item link (Hourly production link)

File name: Hourly item link File No.: 031 Max. allocatable records: 480

Totalizer

Counter

File No.

024

Record No.

Description Choice Program code

Link record No.

Always “0”

Link file No.

::::

D8 D7 D6 D5

;

:::

D3 D2 D1

Significant

number

Significant

number

R-197

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-12. Mix and match file

A-2-12-1 Mix and match (daily)

File name: Mix and match (daily) File No.: 051 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-12-2 Mix and match (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Mix and match (periodic 1) File No.: 151 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Mix and match (periodic 2) File No.: 251 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Mix and match (daily consolidation) File No.: 351 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Mix and match (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 451 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Mix and match (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 551 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Mix and match (consolidation work) File No.: 651 Max. allocatable records: 99

Character

0161922

Discount

amount

rate

Random

code

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Comb 1

item

414038

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Comb 2

item

464543

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Comb 3

item

515048

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Comb 4

item

565553

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Comb 5

item

616058

Rec. No.

File No.

Quantity

Target

item

6563

Work

Program

Counter Totalizer

71 76

Totalizer

Counter

R-198

File Format

A-2-13. IDC file

A-2-13-1 IDC file (1)

File name: IDC (1) File No.: 057 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (1) (daily consolidation) File No.: 357 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (1) (consolidation work) File No.: 657 Max. allocatable records: 100000

A-2-13-2 IDC file (2)

File name: IDC (2) File No.: 058 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (2) (daily consolidation) File No.: 358 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (2) (consolidation work) File No.: 658 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File structure is same as IDC file (1)

A-2-13-3 IDC file (3)

File name: IDC (3) File No.: 059 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (3) (daily consolidation) File No.: 359 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File name: IDC (3) (consolidation work) File No.: 659 Max. allocatable records: 100000

File structure is same as IDC file (1)

Refer to the page 75 ~ 81 of this manual for each IDC data in detail.

A-2-13-4 IDC link

File name: IDC link File No.: 804 Max. allocatable records: 999

Refer to page 64 of the programming manual for details.

060

IDC Data

PGM

Link

File No.

Record No.

R-199

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-14. Time & Attendance file

A-2-14-1 Hourly / Labor

File name: Hourly / Labor File No.: 014 Max. allocatable records: 96

A-2-14-2. Work time file

File name: Work Time File No.: 019 Max. allocatable records: 4158

File name: Work Time (daily consolidation) File No.: 319 Max. allocatable records: 4158

Min. number of files to fix the work time:

The number of employee × 7 (days) × 3 (shift) × 2 (weeks)

Max. allocatable records:

99 × 7 × 3 × 2 = 4158

Rec#001~#003: Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#004~#006: Correspond to 2nd day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#007~#009: Correspond to 3rd day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#010~#012: Correspond to 4th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#013~#015: Correspond to 5th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#016~#018: Correspond to 6th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#019~#021: Correspond to 7th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (First week)

Rec#020~#024: Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#025~#027: Correspond to 2nd day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#028~#030: Correspond to 3rd day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#031~#033: Correspond to 4th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#034~#036: Correspond to 5th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#037~#039: Correspond to 6th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#040~#042: Correspond to 7th day of the week of Employee Rec#001 (Second week)

Rec#043~#045: Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee Rec#002 (First week)

•

CLOCK-IN

date

WORK time

EDIT flag

01 4 6 8 13 17 18

BREAK time

Job code

CLOCK-IN

time

CLOCK-OUT

time

Cash tip

declare

Totalizer

(Net)

Total labor

hours (Fixed)

0 5 10 13 18 21 26

Counter

(Net)

Total

labor

cost

(Fixed)

Total labor

hours (Not fixed)

Total

labor

cost

(Not fixed)

R-200

File Format

A-2-14-3. Time zone file

File name: Time zone File No.: 800 Max. allocatable records: 24

Divide one day into some time zones, and assign the length of one cycle per zone.

Refer to page 60 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-14-4. Employee file

File name: Employee File No.: 801 Max. allocatable records: 99

Refer to page 62 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-14-5. Job code file

File name: Job code File No.: 802 Max. allocatable records: 50

Refer to page 61 of the programming manual for details.

Employee No.

Social

Security

No.

Job code (1)

PGM

24 25 2627

Job code (2)

Job code (3)

Job code (4)

Clerk No.

Work

(1)

Work

(2)

Work

(3)

282930

32 34 36

Character

End time

Start time

Cycle

Pay

rate

016

PGM

not used

20 22

Character

R-201

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Start time

Job code

Break time

End time

Grace before start

5 7 8 9 1011

Grace after start

Grace before end

Grace after end

A-2-14-6. Schedule file

File name: Schedule File No.: 803 Max. allocatable records: 2079

Min. number of files to fix the work time: The number of employee × 7 days × 3 shift

Max. allocatable records: 99 × 7 × 3 = 2079

Rec#001: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#002: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#003: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#004: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#005: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#006: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001

•

Rec#021: Correspond to 7th day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001

Rec#022: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#002

Rec#023: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#002

Rec#024: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#002

Rec#025: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#002

Rec#026: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#002

Rec#027: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#002

•

Work

Personal No.

Clock-in time

Clock-out time

Clock-out reason

Not used

015 16 1724 7 11

A-2-14-7. Simple time and attendance file

File name: Simple time and attendance File No.: 013 Max. allocatable records: 9999

A-2-14-8. Clock-out reason file

File name: Clock-out reason File No.: 944 Max. allocatable records: 10

Character

016

R-202

File Format

A-2-15. Void table file

A-2-15-1 Void table (daily)

File name: Void table (daily) File No.: 012 Max. allocatable records: 99

Refer to page 54 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-15-2 Void table (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Void table (periodic 1) File No.: 112 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Void table (periodic 2) File No.: 212 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Void table (daily consolidation) File No.: 312 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Void table (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 412 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Void table (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 512 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Void table (consolidation work) File No.: 612 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-16. Table analysis file

A-2-16-1 Table analysis (daily)

File name: Table analysis (daily) File No.: 018 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-16-2 Table analysis (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Table analysis (periodic 1) File No.: 118 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Table analysis (periodic 2) File No.: 218 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Table analysis (daily consolidation) File No.: 318 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Table analysis (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 418 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Table analysis (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 518 Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: Table analysis (consolidation work) File No.: 618 Max. allocatable records: 99

Character Counter

Program

Totalizer

016

19 24 29

Counter Totalizer

0510

Character

Min. check #

Max. check #

not used

No. of

customer Totalizer

016

19 2223 28 33

Counter Totalizer

0510

R-203

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-17. Grand total file

A-2-17-1 Grand total (daily)

File name: Grand total (daily) File No.: 020 Max. allocatable records:3 (fixed)

A-2-17-2 Grand total (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Grand total (periodic 1) File No.: 120 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

File name: Grand total (periodic 2) File No.: 220 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

File name: Grand total (daily consolidation) File No.: 320 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

File name: Grand total (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 420 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

File name: Grand total (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 520 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

File name: Grand total (consolidation work) File No.: 620 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

Character Totalizer

01624

Totalizer

R-204

File Format

A-2-18. Customer file

A-2-18-1 Customer file

File name: Customer file File No.: 037 Max. allocatable records: 4000

A-2-18-2 Customer group file (daily)

File name: Customer group (daily) File No.: 042 Max. allocatable records: 20

A-2-18-3 Customer group (periodic/consolidation)

File name: Customer group (periodic 1) File No.: 142 Max. allocatable records: 20

File name: Customer group (periodic 2) File No.: 242 Max. allocatable records: 20

File name: Customer group (daily consolidation) File No.: 342 Max. allocatable records: 20

File name: Customer group (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 442 Max. allocatable records: 20

File name: Customer group (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 542 Max. allocatable records: 20

File name: Customer group (consolidation work) File No.: 642 Max. allocatable records: 20

A-2-18-3 Customer title

File name: Customer title File No.: 123 Max. allocatable records: 9

Customer

number

Customer

name

Customer

address 1

055

Customer

address 2

Customer

address 3

103

Customer

address 4

127 1336317

Title link

Customer

phone No.

134

Customer

group link

135

Status

140

not used

145

Finalized GT

Discount GT

Not used

170150

Customer

group

name

Credit

limit

0 38 4222

Discount 1

16 2117

Type

Print control

Character

Program

117112107

Spent total

Not used

Counter

12258 62

Discount 2

Character

78 82

Discount 3

Character

98 102

Discount 4

Character

Counter

Spent

total Not

used

10 15

Character

R-205

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Program

A-2-19. General control file

A-2-19-1 General control

File name: General control File No.: 022 Max. allocatable records: 50(fixed)

Rec No. Contents Reference page

(PGM manual)

001 Date order, Monetary mode 129

002 (not used) ---

003 Consecutive number 130

004 Rounding, Tax system 130

005 Receipt control (1) 131

006 Calculation, Operation control (1) 132

007 Calculation, Operation control (2) ---

008 Report control (1) 133

009 Report control (2) 134

010 Receipt control (2), Till timer 135

011 Scale ---

012 Report control (3) 136

013 Communication control 136

014 Report control (4) 137

015 Report control (5) 138

016 Time frame 139

017 Receipt control (3), Calculation method 140

018 Slip / Guest receipt control 141

019 Journal control (Electronic journal) 142

020 Message print control 142

021 Order control (1) 143

022 Hotel server 143

023 Australian GST control (1) 143

024 Australian GST control (2), Loyalty card 144

025 Set menu, Condiment 144

026 Check tracking 145

027 Clerk interrupt 146

028 Display control 146

029 (not used) ---

030 Order control (2) ---

031 Touch screen 146

032 (not used) ---

033 (not used) ---

034 (not used) ---

035 Time & Attendance 147

036 Store / Recall range 147

037 Auto check No. range 147

038 (not used) ---

039 Automatic creating customer No. range ---

040 (not used) ---

041 (not used) ---

042 Customer control (1) 148

043 Customer control (2) 148

044 Sound control 149

045 Work time

046 Pay ratio

047 Order control (3)

048 VMP stop code

049 External device

050 Commission threshold

R-206

File Format

A-2-21. Report header file

A-2-20-1 Report header

File name: Report header File No.: 024 Max. allocatable records: 55(fixed)

Character

016

A-2-20. Special character file

A-2-20-1 Special character

File name: Special character File No.: 023 Max. allocatable records: 99(fixed)

Character

016

Refer to page 134 of the programming manual for details.

Refer to page 135 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-22. Tax table file

A-2-19-1 Tax table

File name: Tax table File No.: 025 Max. allocatable records: 10

Actual

value

Rate

Max. Table

amount

Rounding

074467

Singapore

rounding

Cal. type

Cyclic pattern

Cyclic value

Non cyclic value

10 12 14

R-207

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-23. Pulldown group file

A-2-23-1 Pulldown group

File name: Pulldown group File No.: 026 Max. allocatable records: 999

A-2-24. Set menu table file

A-2-24-1 Set menu table

File name: Set menu table File No.: 028 Max. allocatable records: 999

Record No. 1

Record No. 2

Record No. 3

Record No. 4

Record No. 5

Record No. 6

Record No. 7

Record No. 8

Record No. 9

File No. 1

File No. 2

File No. 3

File No. 4

File No. 5

File No. 6

File No. 7

File No. 8

File No. 9

Record No.10

0246 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38

Record No.11

Record No.12

Record No.13

Record No.14

Record No.15

Record No.16

Record No.17

Record No.18

File No.11

File No.12

File No.13

File No.15

File No.16

File No.17

File No.18

Record No.19

40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54

56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74

Record No.20

File No.19

File No.20

76 78 80

File No.10

File No.14

Character

Record No. 1

File No. 1

Key color link 1

016 19 2320 26

not used

Keytop

text 1

not used

893 917 921

Keytop

text 28

5325

Record No. 2

File No. 2

Key color link 2

54 5655

Program

Win color link

Key type

Record No. 28

File No. 28

Key color link 28

887885 889 890

R-208

File Format

A-2-25. Batch X/Z file

A-2-25-1 Batch X/Z

File name: Batch X/Z File No.: 029 Max. allocatable records: 10

Mode

Program

X/Z code (1)

X/Z code (2)

X/Z code (3)

X/Z code (4)

X/Z code (5)

X/Z code (6)

X/Z code (7)

012345678910

X/Z code (8)

A-2-26. Receipt / Slip message file

A-2-26-1 Receipt / Slip message

File name: Receipt / Slip message File No.: 032 Max. allocatable records: 96

A-2-27. Check endorsement message file

A-2-27-1 Check endorsement message

File name: Check endorsement message File No.: 033 Max. allocatable records: 4

Character

0 40

Character

0 40

Refer to page 132 of the programming manual for details.

R-209

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-28. Arrangement file

A-2-28-1 Arrangement group (1) ~ (5)

File name: Arrangement group (1) File No.: 038 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Arrangement group (2) File No.: 138 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Arrangement group (3) File No.: 238 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Arrangement group (4) File No.: 338 Max. allocatable records: 9999

File name: Arrangement group (5) File No.: 438 Max. allocatable records: 9999

Arrange

(character)

024

A-2-29. Character recall file

A-2-29-1 Character recall

File name: Character recall File No.: 039 Max. allocatable records: 9999

A-2-30. Check print file

A-2-30-1 Check print

File name: Check print File No.: 041 Max. allocatable records: 9

A-2-31. Graphic logo file

A-2-31-1 Graphic logo (external printer)

File name: Graphic logo (external printer) File No.: 047 Max. allocatable records: 432 (fixed)

or 864 (fixed)

Character

040

Control

data

Graphic data

013

R-210

File Format

Order character

016

A-2-32. Scheduler file

A-2-32-1 Scheduler

File name: Scheduler File No.: 062 Max. allocatable records: 99

Start time

End time

Interval 1

Not used

Interval 2

Arrange tbl No.

file No.

0142458 12

Refer to page 48 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-33. Order character file

A-2-33-1 Order character

File name: Order character File No.: 065 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-34. Euro program file

A-2-34-1 Euro program file

File name: Euro program File No.: 099 Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

Program

Refer to page 181 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-35. Character conversion for CF file

A-2-35-1 Character conversion for CF file

File name: Character conversion for CF File No.: 087 Max. allocatable records: 1000

Program

R-211

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-36. Check# pop-up window definition file

A-2-36-1 Check# pop-up window definition file

File name: Check# pop-up window definition File No.: 115 Max. allocatable records: 700(fixed)

Check number

Key type

not used

Bitmap link

0673 4

Refer to page 182 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-37. Clerk pop-up window definition file

A-2-37-1 Clerk pop-up window definition file

File name: Clerk pop-up window definition File No.: 117 Max. allocatable records: 315

Clerk rec. No.

Key type

not used

Bitmap link

Key color link

0561 2 3

Refer to page 197 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-38. Sound file

A-2-38-1 Sound (1) ~ (10) file

File name: Sound (1) File No.: 701 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (2) File No.: 702 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (3) File No.: 703 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (4) File No.: 704 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (5) File No.: 705 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (6) File No.: 706 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (7) File No.: 707 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (8) File No.: 708 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (9) File No.: 709 Max. allocatable records: 65000

File name: Sound (10) File No.: 710 Max. allocatable records: 65000

0128

Data

Sound file: (in case of creating by PC)

1. .wav file

2. PCM recording

3. Sampling frequency; 11.025 / 22.050 / 44.100 kHz

4. 16 bit monaural

R-212

File Format

A-2-39. Add on VMP file

A-2-39-1 Add on VMP file

File name: Add on VMP File No.: 040 Max. allocatable records: 999

Data

051

A-2-40. Intelligent EJ file

A-2-40-1 Intelligent EJ file

File name: Intelligent EJ File No.: 050 Max. allocatable records: 100000

Data

0 101

Character

040

A-2-41. Menu title character file

A-2-41-1 Menu title character file

File name: Menu title character File No.: 085 Max. allocatable records: 60

A-2-42. Tare table file

A-2-42-1 Tare table file

File name: Tare table File No.: 127 Max. allocatable records: 9

Character PGM

01622

R-213

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-43. Screen logo file

A-2-43-1 Screen logo file

File name: Screen logo File No.: 796 Max. allocatable records: 9833 (fixed)

Bipmap

0 160

A-2-44. Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file

A-2-44-1 Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file

File name: Full screen check window

File No.: 797, 798, 799 Max. allocatable records: 9833 (fixed)

Bipmap

0 160

A-2-45. Additional PLU program file

A-2-45-1 Additional PLU program file

File name: Additional PLU program File No.: 814 Max. allocatable records: 9999

Program not used

Color Link

Price 2

Price 3

Work

079 12 15 44 46

A-2-46. External device serial number file

A-2-46-1 External device serial number file

File name: External device serial number File No.: 920 Max. allocatable records: 4

PGM

R-214

File Format

A-2-47. Additional PLU character file

A-2-47-1 Additional PLU character file

File name: Additional PLU character File No.: 941 Max. allocatable records: 9999

PLU code Character PGM

07 31 32

A-2-48. Free function list file

A-2-48-1 Free function list file

File name: Free function list File No.: 946 Max. allocatable records: 99

Rec-No.

R-215

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-49. System files

A-2-49-1 Key table

File name: Key table File No.: 074 Max. allocatable records: 2 (fixed)

Func code

Rec No.

not used

024 48

Logical ID IP address

Distinct M/BM

CHK PGM

not used

Check cluster No.

CHK PGM Status

012 14 16 18 24

A-2-49-2 Touch screen key table

File name: Touch screen key table File No.: 174 Max. allocatable records: 2280(fixed)

Description Choice Program code

Logical ID characters (within 12 characters)

Terminal:

Oneself = 02, Others = 01

Check tracking master/backup master (program value):

Master = 01, Backup master = 02, Self master = 03, Satellite = 00

Check tracking master/backup master (current value):

Master = 01, Backup master = 02, Self master = 03, Satellite = 00

Always “00000”

Check tracking cluster number (0 ~ 9)

(“0” means no designation.)

IP address: 192.168.0.0. ~ 192.168.255.255

Significant

characters

Significant

numbers

Significant

numbers

Significant

numbers

Significant

number

::::::

D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19

::::::

D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13

D12 D11

D10 D9

D8 D7

;;;;;

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2

Key table Hard key

record No. code

001 not used

002 for Disp on/off

Func code

Key type

not used

Rec No.

Color link

Bitmap link

Keytop text

02456 89 33

A-2-49-3 System connection table

File name: System connection table File No.: 901 Max. allocatable records: 33

R-216

File Format

Terminal No.

Time

Date

Operation

Error function

Error code

02469711

A-2-49-6 System error log

File name: System error log File No.: 999 Max. allocatable records: 999

Program

Main ECR ID Backup ECR ID

Type

Main printer No.

Backup printer No.

0113252627

A-2-49-4 I/O parameter table

File name: I/O parameter table File No.: 902 Max. allocatable records: 20

A-2-49-5 Printer connection table

File name: Printer connection table File No.: 903 Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-49-7 Auto program control

File name: Auto program control File No.: 905 Max. allocatable records: 20

File No.

Program

023

Refer to page 65 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-8 LCD color control

File name: LCD color control File No.: 906 Max. allocatable records: 99

Refer to page 66 of the programming manual for details.

Program

Refer to page 55 ~ 58 of the programming manual for details.

Refer to page 176 of the programming manual for details.

Refer to page 96, 228, 229 of this manual for details.

R-217

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-49-9 Keyboard color definition

File name: Keyboard color definition File No.: 907 Max. allocatable records: 100

Refer to page 71 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-10 Keyboard color theme

File name: Keyboard color theme File No.: 908 Max. allocatable records: 100

Refer to page 70 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-11 Keyboard bitmap image

File name: Keyboard bitmap image (for single key) File No.: 909 Max. allocatable records: 29400

File name: Keyboard bitmap image File No.: 910 Max. allocatable records: 93600

Program

Data

0200

Bitmap file: (in case of creating by PC)

1. Windows bitmap file

2. Max. 16.77 million color

3. No. of single key + 2 x No. of double key + 4 x No. of quadruple key is less than

or eqaul to 300. (only for file-910)

4. Key size

Key area Check/ clerk window

File-909 Single key available not available

Single key available available

File-910 Horizontal double key

available available

Vertical double key available available

Quadruple key available available

R-218

File Format

A-2-49-12 TCP/IP control

File name: TCP/IP control File No.: 900 Max. allocatable records: 26 (fixed)

Refer to page 71 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-14 FTP Login Name

File name: FTP login name File No.: 911 Max. allocatable records: 10

A-2-49-15 FTP Server Name

File name: FTP server name File No.: 912 Max. allocatable records: 9

Refer to page 73 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-16 FTP Trans file

File name: FTP trans file File No.: 913 Max. allocatable records: 99

Refer to page 73 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-17 Character key table file

File name: Character key table File No.: 274 Max. allocatable records: 152 (fixed)

Program

PasswordLogin -ID

010 20

IP address Login-ID

Server title not

used

020 46

26 62

Password Login

folder name

78 98

File-No.

File name

Program

Title

020 44

22 24

1st Chara code

897645321

2nd Chara code

3rd Chara code

4th Chara code

5th Chara code

6th Chara code

7th Chara code

8th Chara code

Color link

R-219

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-2-49-18 PS2 key table file

File name: PS2 key table File No.: 374 Max. allocatable records: 811 (fixed)

4562

Function code

Record-#

Chara code

CAPS Lock

A-2-49-19 Key table (full screen) file

File name: Key table (full screen) File No.: 795 Max. allocatable records: 240

Function code

Location (X1)

Location (Y1)

Location (X2)

Location (Y2)

Location (X1, Y1)

Key

Location (X2, Y2)

Key type

(binary)

Key

Keytop text 1 Keytop text 2

color

(RGB)

6 8 10 11

not used

2114

Text

color

(RGB)

Check/

rec-#

not used

42 6241

Rec-001 ~ 080: Full screen check window 1

Rec-081 ~ 160: Full screen check window 2

Rec-161 ~ 240: Full screen check window 3

Key type

• No key: 00

• Rectangular key: 01

• Circular key: 02

R-220

File Format

R-221

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-3.Counter and Totalizer calculation method ......................................... R-220

A-3-1 Fixed totalizer file ........................................................................................ R-220

R-222

Calculation method

A-3. Counter and Totalizer calculation method

The following calculation methods of fixed totalizer memories are explained in this

chapter.

All formulas in these explanations are calculated in the registration mode.

In the REF mode, the values in totalizers are calculated using the opposite sign.

In the REG– mode, the values in totalizers and counters are calculated using the opposite

sign.

A-3-1 Fixed totalizer file

Total or counter Increments or Decrements by

Gross sales quantity

Gross sales amount

Net sales quantity

Net sales amount

Medium in drawer

(Cash, charge, check, credit)

Number of products registered for Departments + Subdepartments + PLUs (non hash)

{For Department, Subdepartment, PLUs and Scan PLUs

Single items

Multiplication

Split price

Square

Cube

– Last item void – Return item – Previous item void – Cancel

Amount of products registered for Departments + Subdepartments + PLUs (non hash)

{For Department, Subdepartment, PLUs and Scan PLUs

Single items

Multiplication

Split price

Square

Cube

– Last item void – Return item – Previous item void – Cancel

+1 (When a transaction is finalized for sale. For REG– mode –1 is affected.)

Amount at the finalization (exclude tip):

{Department + Subdepartment + PLU +Scan PLU product registration amounts (non full hash)

– Last item void amounts for the above

– Item return amounts for the above

– Previous item void amounts for the above

– Cancel amounts for the above}

+ {Plus (+ key)

+ Premium (%+ key)

– Error correction amounts

– Cancel amounts}

– {Minus (– key)

+ Discount(%– key)

+ Coupon

– Error correction amounts

– Cancel amounts}

+ Results of tax table calculations (add-on tax)

Sales total or tendered total by specified medium

+ Received on account total (Cash in drawer only)

– Paid out (Cash in drawer only)

+ Check cashing (Check in drawer only)

+ Loan totals by selected medium

– Pick up totals by selected medium

– Change amounts generated with the specific medium (Cash in drawer only)

– Total of check cashing transaction (Cash in drawer only)

– corrected amount by <MEDIA CHANGE> key

+ correcting amount by <MEDIA CHANGE> key

: +1

: Input quantity

: Input quantity × Input quantity

: Input quantity × Input quantity × Input quantity}

: Preset or manually input prices

: Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity

: (Preset or manually input prices / Input unit quantity)

× Input quantity

: Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity

× Input quantity

: Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity

× Input quantity × Input quantity}

R-223

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Total or counter Increments or Decrements by

Number of Refund mode

Refund mode amount

Customer count

Average sales per customer

Check cashing service fee

New balance fee

Clerk commission total

Foreign currency in drawer

Reduction

Item return amount

Clear count

Rounding

ST transfer void

Taxable amount

Tax amount

Tax exempt

Euro in drawer

Coupon

Money declaration

GT 1

GT 2

GT 3

(When cash sales, charge sales, credit sales, and check sales transaction are finalized in the

REF/REG– mode.)

Absolute value of total sales amount for REF/REG– mode registrations.

Entered number of covers or +1

Net sales amount / Customer count

+ Check amount × Service ratio or

+ Service fee amount

+ MD/ST amount × Service charge ratio or

+ Service charge fee amount

Item sales (commissionable) × Clerk commission rate or flat fee

Entered amount in foreign currency.

+ Registered amount of Minus, %- key

+ Registered item amount by RF, Void key

+ 1 (REG, REF, REG– mode)

(When the <CLEAR> key is pressed.)

+ Fraction amount by country roundings

+ Void total of ST transfer

Subtotal of taxable amount at finalization of sale

(in case of add-on tax)

Subtotal of taxable amount / (1 + VAT rate) at finalization of sale

(in case of add-in tax)

Result of calculation using tax table for taxable amount at finalization of sales

(in case of add-on tax)

Subtotal of taxable amount - Taxable amount calculated above

(in case of add-in tax)

Exempted taxable subtotal amount

Sales total or tendered total by specified medium in Euro

Coupon total

+1 (when money declaration is performed.)

Grand total of net sales total

Registrations absolute value:

{Registration amount (Department, Subdepartment, PLU, Scan PLU)

+ Last item void amount

+ Previous item void amount

+ Refund amount}

+ {Plus, Minus, Premium, Discount, Coupon

+ Last item void amount}

Net sales total

– add-on tax

– add-in tax

– commission

R-224

Calculation method

R-225

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-4. Error messages ................................................................................... R-224

A-4-1 Error messages........................................................................................... R-224

A-4-2 Operation prompt ........................................................................................ R-227

A-4-3 System error code....................................................................................... R-228

R-226

Error messages

A-4. Error messages

A-4-1 Error messages

When an error occurs on a QT-6600 terminal, a buzzer sounds and the appropriate error

message appears on the main display, indicating what action to take.

The following table lists the error messages and describes the action to take.

Prompt message Meaning Action

Operator mistake.

E001 Wrong mode.

E003 Wrong operator.

E005 Insufficient memory.

E011 Close the drawer.

E016 Change back to REG mode.

E017 Enter Check/TBL number.

E018 Enter Table number.

E019 Enter Number of covers.

E020 Enter Seat number.

E021 No dept link.

E023 Stock running short.

E024 No stock is available.

E025 Scale Read Error

E028 Not found PLU or C/D is

mismatch.

E029 No registration is possible

while you are in the tender

operation.

E031 Press ST key before Finalization.

E032 Press FSST key before Finalization.

E033 Enter tendered amount.

E035 Change amount exceeds the limit.

E036 Remove money from the drawer.

E037 Digit or Amount Limitation Over.

E038 Perform Money Declaration

E040 Issue Guest Receipt.

E041 Print Validation.

E044 Print Cheque.

E045 Print Check-Endorsement.

E046 REG Buffer Full. Please

Finalize or NB.

E047 Print bill.

E048 Insert Slip paper and retry.

E049 CHECK memory Full.

E050 Detail memory full.

E051 CHK/TBL No. is occupied.

E052 CHK/TBL No. is Busy.

E053 CHK/TBL No. is not opened.

E054 Out of CHK/TBL No. Range.

E056 Store range full.

E057 No item exists in detail.

E058 Enter post entry item.

E059 Press Eat-in or Take-out key.

**********

E060 Printer offline.

**********

E061 Printer error.

Operation error

Check tracking (Open mode error)

Error clerk/Error clerk in check tracking

Memory allocation over

Drawer compulsory

Prohibit plural operation in REF/REG– mode

Check number compulsory

Table number compulsory

Cover compulsory

Seat number compulsory

Scanning PLU item w/o department link is

registered.

Alarm when any item drops below its programmed

minimum stock quantity during registration.

Error when actual stock value for a registration

items is a negative value.

Scale read error

Scanning PLU is not found or OBR code is

mismatched.

Attempted registration whilst partial tender

operation is being done.

ST compulsory

FSST compulsory

Amount tender compulsory

Change amount exceeds the limit.

Contents of the drawer exceed the programmed

limit — Sentinel function.

H.D.L., H.A.L., L.D.L. error

Money declaration compulsory

Guest receipt compulsory

Validation compulsory

Check print compulsory

Check endorsement compulsory

Registration buffer full

Slip compulsory

Alarm when no paper is inserted in the Slip.

Check tracking index full/near end

Check tracking memory full/near end

Attempt is made to use the <NEW CHECK> key to

open a new check using a number that is already

used for an existing check tracking memory.

Attempt to use the same check number whilst the

specified number is being used in the other terminal.

Check number not found

Check number range over

All check number are occupied in range.

Round repeat cannot be found in detail.

Post entry item has not been registered yet.

Eat-in, Takeout compulsory

Printer offline. “****” means ECR logical ID

and printer number.

Printer downed. “****” means ECR logical ID

and printer number.

Perform proper operation.

Return the mode to its original setting.

Input correct check number or assign the proper

clerk.

Reallocate memory.

Close cash drawer.

Switch to another mode and then back to the

REF/REG– mode again.

Input a check number.

Input a table number.

Enter the number of customers.

Input a seat number.

Link the item to a department.

Perform stock maintenance.

Retry weighing the item.

Re-enter the PLU code.

Finalize the transaction.

Press ST key.

Press FSST key.

Enter tendered amount.

Enter amount tendered again.

Perform pickup operation.

Enter correct unit price/amount.

Perform money declaration.

Issue a guest receipt.

Perform validation operation.

Perform check print operation.

Perform check endorsement operation.

Finalize the transaction.

Allocate sufficient buffer.

Perform slip printing operation.

Insert new slip paper.

Finalize and close the check number currently

used.

Finalize and close the check number currently

used.

Finalize and close the check that is currently

under the number that you want to use or use a

different check number.

Use another check number or close the check at

that terminal.

Use the correct check number (if you want to

reopen a check that already exists in the check

tracking memory) or use <NEW CHECK> to

open a new check.

Enter correct number.

Recall the stored data.

Enter Post entry item.

Press Eat-in or Takeout key.

The contents are printed on the backup printer.

R-227

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Prompt message Meaning Action

**********

E061 Printer error.

YES:Retry to print.

NO :Show on the screen.

ESC:Discard data.

**********

E062 Printer paper end.

**********

E062 Printer paper end.

YES:Retry to print.

NO :Show on the screen.

ESC:Discard data.

E064 Printer buffer full.

YES:Retry to print.

NO :Show on the screen.

ESC:Discard data.

**********

E070 Terminal out of action.

Cannot print.

**********

E071 Target terminal printer

BF full.

YES:Retry to print.

NO :Show on the screen.

ESC:Discard data.

**********

E072 Target printer terminal

is busy.

**********

E073 Your receipt/order may not be

issued.

YES:Retry to print.

NO :Show on the screen.

ESC:Discard data.

E075 Negative Balance,

Cannot be Finalized.

E080 Electronic Journal Full

Please clear E-Journal.

E082 ***** Illegal Data *****

E083 Cannot create E-Journal.

Check Flash memory.

**********

E105 Check/TBL tracking Master

down. Please call Manager!!

YES:Retry for connection.

NO :Remove it from system.

**********

E106 Check/TBL tracking Backup

master down. Please call

Manager!!

YES:Retry for connection.

NO :Remove it from system.

**********

E107 Both Master&Backup master

down. CHK/TBL tracking or

Clerk interrupt is not

available.

**********

E108 CHK/TBL Master is removed

from system.

**********

E109 CHK/TBL Backup master is

removed from system.

E110 CHK data mismatch between

Master and Backup master.

E130 Middle of Pick up or Loan

Press Cancel Key.

E131 Middle of <Bill Copy>

Press Cancel Key.

E133 Middle of <Media Change>

Press Cancel Key.

E134 Middle of Clerk Transfer

Press ESC Key.

Printer downed. “****” means ECR logical ID

and printer number.

Paper near-end/end “****” means ECR logical

ID and printer number.

Paper near-end/end “****” means ECR logical

ID and printer number.

Print buffer full at sender side

Down at target ECR which has printer

“****” means ECR logical ID and printer

number.

Printer buffer full at target ECR which has

printer

“****” means ECR logical ID and printer

number.

Busy at target ECR which has printer

“****” means ECR logical ID and printer

number.

Time out at ECR which has printer

“****” means ECR logical ID and printer

number.

Attempted finalization when balance is less than

zero.

Electronic journal full

Illegal Electronic journal data

Electronic journal file cannot be created.

CHK master down

“****” means ECR logical ID.

CHK BM down

“****” means ECR logical ID.

CHK M/BM down

“****” means ECR logical ID.

Master down then take it off from system

“****” means ECR logical ID.

Backup master down then take it off from

system

“****” means ECR logical ID.

Data mismatch has occurred.

During picking up

During bill copy

During media change

During clerk transfer

Follow the prompt message.

Set new paper.

The contents are printed on the backup printer.

Follow the prompt message.

Please check the terminal

Follow the prompt message.

positive amount.

Reset the electronic journal memory.

Check flash memory.

Follow the prompt message.

R-228

Error messages

Prompt message Meaning Action

E139 Not allowed to be negative

by Minus/Coupon key.

E140 Wrong menu.

E141 Press <TRAY TTL> twice before

finalization.

E145 Arrangement syntax error.

E150 Incorrect value entry.

E151 Incorrect Key Pressed.

E152 PGM File or Memory number

does not Exist.

E164 Employee No. is not Found

in the Employee File.

E165 Employee No. is not Clocking-in.

E166 Employee No. is Occupied.

E167 Incorrect Job code.

E168 Your Operation is out of

Schedule.

Please Call Manager.

E169 Work Hours Exceeded.

Please Call Manager.

E170 No Shift Remains in the

Schedule.

You cannot Clock-in.

E171 Please Break-out and Retry.

E172 Break Hours Exceeded.

Please Call Manager.

E173 This employee is at work now.

E174 This employee is taking a break

now.

E175 Please Clock-in/Break-out

before you sign on.

or Please Call Manager.

E176 You cannot Clock-in.

Please reset Employee Report.

E177 Time&Attendance Data

Communication Error.

Please Call Manager.

E180 IDC FILE (1) memory full.

Please clear IDC data.

E181 IDC FILE (2) memory full.

Please clear IDC data.

E182 IDC FILE (3) memory full.

Please clear IDC data.

E184 OPEN CHK/TBL data exist.

E185 Item is not active.

E200 Insert CF Card.

E201 Format error.

E203 Insufficient memory.

E205 The file already exists.

Do you replace?

YES:Replace the file.

NO :Input new name.

E210 Mag Card Reader Error.

E211 Wrong Card Prefix Code.

E212 Card Expired.

E213 Card Validation Failed.

E215 Card Format Error.

E240 Customer No. is occupied.

E241 Customer memory full.

E242 Customer not found.

E243 Illegal Site ID.

E244 Credit limit over.

E251 Magnetic card error.

E252 Enter customer name.

E253 Enter address.

Credit balance error

This menu is prohibited by program.

<TRAY TOTAL> key is not pressed twice

before finalization.

Arrangement syntax error

Incorrect entry for PGM

Linking is incorrect.

No such file, no such record

Employee No. is not set in the Employee File.

Employee has not done CLOCK-IN operation

yet.

Employee who has done CLOCK-IN operation

attempts to operate CLOCK-IN again.

Employee attempts to operate CLOCK-IN with

incorrect JOB code.

Employees operate CLOCK-IN/OUT in not

allowance time.

Overtime work.

There is no available shift left.

Employee attempts to operate CLOCK-OUT

whilst he/she is in a break time.

Break hours are exceeded.

Employee is at work without break.

Employee who has not done BREAK-OUT

operation attempts to operate BREAK-IN.

Sign on after you clock-in or break out.

Employee Report has not been reset.

Time & Attendance Data communication error.

IDC FILE (1) memory is full of items.

IDC FILE (2) memory is full of items.

IDC FILE (3) memory is full of items.

Open check/ table data exist while resetting

fixed total.

CF card is not inserted to the slot.

CF card data or formats illegal.

Insufficient memory is remained in CF card.

File name duplication error

Magnetic card read error.

Card prefix code error

Card is expired.

Card validation is failed.

Card format error

Attempt is made to set a customer that already

exists in the customer file.

Customer file becomes full.

This customer does not exist.

The site No. of the file does not coincide with

the No. of the card.

Attempt to transfer when the balance is over

than the credit limit

This card cannot be read.

This card format is illegal.

Enter proper minus/coupon amount.

Set correct menu.

Follow the prompt message.

Program the arrangement again.

Enter proper value again.

Enter proper key again.

Enter file/record number again.

Enter employee number again.

Perform CLOCK-IN operation.

Enter the proper employee number again.

Enter proper job code.

Follow the prompt message.

Close the opend check/ table data first.

Insert CF card.

Check the CF card.

Format or use a new CF card.

Follow the prompt message.

Swipe the card again.

This card cannot be used.

Enter proper customer No.

Delete unnecessary customer No.

Enter proper customer No.

Swipe the proper magnetic card.

Release credit limit by OPEN2.

Make minus, void, or refund operation to

decrease the balance under the credit limit.

Perform finalization or cancellation.

Swipe the magnetic card again.

Swipe the proper magnetic card.

Follow the prompt message.

R-229

QT-6600 Reference Manual

A-4-2 Operation prompt

All prompt messages, together with descriptors and symbol characters for displaying /

printing are contained in the list below. These messages cannot be added, modified or

deleted.

Prompt message Meaning

Data cannot be printed out.

Do you want to display?

Do you want to clear data?

Cancel OK?

Please wait.

Item Consolidation Mode

Non Consolidation Mode

REG Mode

REFUND Mode

REG- Mode

Training

REG2 Mode

Please Sign on.

Enter Check/Table Number.

Enter Table Number.

Enter Number of covers.

Enter Seat Number.

Perform Slip Printing.

Issue Guest Receipt.

Perform Validation Printing.

Perform Check Printing.

Perform Check Endorsement.

Operation Code?

Re_configuration...

Re_configuration end

Clock-in OK?

Clock-out OK?

Break-in OK?

Break-out OK?

Enter cash tip amount and press

<YES> key.

Communication Error

This procedure stops system

maximum 60 sec.

OK ?

Enter #

Enter Alphacode!

Items not found!

Request to check the X / Z report data which

cannot be printed out.

Confirmation to reset displayed report.

Confirmation of all void operation.

Please wait. ECR now processing.

In the item consolidation mode.

Not in the item consolidation mode.

Mode change : REG mode

Mode change : REF mode

Mode change : REG– mode

Signing on a training operator

Mode change : REG2 mode

The terminal is in signed off.

CHK# compulsory

TBL# compulsory

Covers compulsory

Seat# compulsory

Slip compulsory

GUEST RCT compulsory

VLD compulsory

CHK-PRT compulsory

CHK-END compulsory

Enter secret number for REG 2 mode.

During system reconfiguration

System reconfugiration ends

Time and attendance clock-in operation

Time and attendance clock-out operation

Time and attendance break-in operation

Time and attendance break-out operation

Time and attendance tip declaration compulsory

Communication error during clock-in

Alert before flash memory clear.

Registering Non-add after RC / PD.

To search the appropriate item, enter goods name.

Items cannot be found by item searching.

E254 Enter phone number.

**********

E259 Terminal out of order

YES:Retry

NO: Skip

Follow the prompt message.

Prompt message Meaning Action

Comminication error to the machine ** during

auto updating scanning PLU.

R-230

Error messages

A-4-3 System error code

All error codes are contained in the list below. These error codes are displayed or printed

on error log report.

Error code Meaning

0010 Handler access error (software)

0011 Cannot execute handler (system configuration)

0012 Break by PC

0013 Break by ECR

0014 DSR off before receiving command packet

0015 Receive illegal command number of command packet

0016 Receive illegal character

0017 Send error (hardware)

0018 Receive error (hardware)

0019 Receive illegal data packet

0020 No response error

0021 Receive illegal command phase

0022 Received illegal packet

0023 CNET receive error

0024 Illegal termination by sender

0025 Received illegal packet during receiving data packets

0026 Not enough data packets received

0040 No “H” information

0041 No “I” information

0042 No “F” information

0044 Illegal packet format

0045 No file exists

0046 Illegal block

0047 Illegal command packet

0048 Illegal command No. (Not CMD)

0049 Illegal command No. (Not DATA)

0050 Sequence error

0051 Turn off DSR signal

0052 Received cancellation

0053 Retry over while waiting command

0054 Retry over while waiting EOT

0055 Retry over while waiting data

0056 Received EOT

0057 Retry over while waiting ACK

0058 Retry over while sending data

0059 Retry over while waiting “C”

0060 Retry over while sending response

0061 Retry over while excluding

0064 Break end

0065 Error during printing report header

0066 Error during printing report data

0067 Error during printing report data in work file

0068 Error during printing report data in consolidation file

0069 Work file clear error

0070 Consolidation file clear error

0071 Z lock error

0072 Z clear error

0073 Z lock release error

0074 Error during accumulating to consolidation file

0075 Error during copying report data from terminal memory to work

0076 Error during copying stock data to terminal memory

0077 Z lock error on satellite terminal

0078 No appropriate file is exist on satellite terminal during collection/consolidation

0079 Z lock release error on satellite terminal

0081 Check tracking master is removed from system.

R-231

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Error code Meaning

0082 Check tracking backup master is removed from system.

0112 Wrong NB/Purge access for INDEX

0128 Parameter error / Maximum length of send error

0130 Error drive

0134 Network parameter error

0138 Detect error in core system

0140 Parameter error (record length exceeds work buffer)

0141 EOF over

0144 Calculation overflow

0145 Undefined value of n_open () mode

0146 Mismatch of type when closing network

0147 Parameter error

0152 Defined NCB is not network resource

0153 Retry over by the target busy

0155 Sequence error

0156 No port exists

0158 Target port in use

0160 Error while getting priority

0161 Fail to change temporary priority

0162 Error semaphore operation to keep resource

0163 Fail to get new sled

0164 Error while getting semaphore

0165 Error to operate semaphore

0166 Error during delay

0167 Error during termination

0168 Error when resource return

0170 Error during getting task ID

0171 No code is found while search/pick up

0172 Cannot get work buffer

0173 File opened/fail to activate task

0174 No file exists

0175 ITRON service error

0176 Cannot create file

0177 Record number error

0178 Detect error while memory area opening

0179 Detect error while returning mail box / double create error

0180 Detect error while handling memory

0190 RCB is not mail box resource

0192 Error send message ID

0194 Send message length over

0197 Ending response

0198 Time out while waiting for ending response / no receive message

0202 No free FCB

0204 Memory capacity shortage

0205 Fail to create mail box

0209 Cannot find the coincide PCB resource

0210 Cannot find the coincide RCB resource

0232 ID collision when network starts

0233 Cannot find the target ID

0235 Protocol error

0247 Stop token

0248 FTP client can’t open data connection.

0249 FTP client requested file action not taken.

0250 FTP client local error in processing

0251 FTP client syntax error

R-232

Error messages

R-233

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Index

Index.............................................................................................................. R-233

R-234

Index

add check R-36, R-180, P-25

add mode P-35

alphabet key P-126

amount symbol P-134

arrangement R-33, R-51, R-180, R-209, P-21, P-25, P-

33, P-79, P-151

arrangement control P-85

arrow key R-29

Australian GST control P-67

auto program control R-216, P-18, P-65, P-182

backspace key P-127

backup master R-17

barcode R-151

batch X/Z R-208, P-21, P-33, P-151

bill copy R-33, R-180, P-25

break-in / out R-36, R-66, R-180, P-25

brightness control R-14

Canadian tax P-35

cancel R-38, R-138, R-180, P-25

cash amount tendered R-30, R-180, P-25

cash drawer R-14

CF X/Z conversion table P-184

character conversion for CF R-210, P-22

character conversion table P-70

character key R-25

character key table P-18

character programming keyboard P-126

character recall R-209, P-21

charge R-30, R-180, P-25

check detail P-20

check endorsement R-32, R-180, R-208, P-25

check index P-20

check print R-28, R-30, R-180, R-209, P-21, P-25, P-

49, P-175

check tender R-30, R-180, P-25

check tracking R-17, R-44, P-46

check window P-68, P-182

check# pop-up window definition R-211

check# popup window definition P-22

circular key P-26

clear key R-29, R-180

clerk R-12, R-164, R-193, P-20

clerk control P-75, P-81

clerk detail R-49, R-194, P-86, P-197

clerk detail link R-194

clerk feature P-185

clerk interrupt R-17, R-48, P-46

clerk key ID R-194, P-87, P-197

clerk number R-34, R-180, P-25

clerk pop-up window definition R-211, R-212, P-22

clerk totalizer R-24

clerk training R-49

clerk transfer R-30, R-180, P-25

clerk window P-87, P-197

clock-in R-62, R-85, R-86

clock-in / out R-36, R-180, P-25

clock-out R-65

collection/consolidation system R-19

COM port R-15, R-16

commission rate P-80, P-86, P-185

communication control P-41

condiment P-45, P-88

connector R-15

connector cover R-10

consecutive number R-12, P-18

consolidation file R-23

consolidation work file R-23

coupon R-31, R-180, P-25

coupon2 R-32, R-180, P-25

covers P-25

credit R-30, R-180, P-25

cube R-35, R-180, P-25

currency exchange R-33, R-180, P-25

customer R-154, R-174, R-204, P-21

customer control P-69

customer count P-134

customer group R-173, R-204, P-21, P-69, P-183

customer ID number R-38, R-180, P-25

customer title R-204, P-21, P-136, P-149, P-150

decimal point R-180

declaration R-180, P-25

delete key P-126

department R-33, R-169, R-180, R-191, P-18, P-25, P-

130, P-141, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198

department number R-37, R-180, P-25

department totalizer R-24

deposit R-31, R-180, P-25

discount R-31, R-180, P-25

display R-13

display area color definition P-18

display buffer P-21

display control P-47

display mode R-38, R-180, P-25

display on/off key R-10, R-29

double key P-26

double size letter key P-126

down arrow R-180

drawer R-15

Dutch account R-38, R-146, P-25

eat-in R-37, R-148, R-180, P-25

EBT tender R-30, R-180, P-25

electronic journal R-38, R-83, R-85, R-87, R-171, P-21

electronic journal display R-180, P-25

employee R-58, R-85, R-171, R-200, P-20, P-62, P-177

end R-29

endorsement R-28, P-21, P-135, P-149

enter key P-127

error correct R-32, R-180, P-25

error message R-226

ESC/SKIP key R-29, R-180, P-127

R-235

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Euro R-31, R-210, P-22, P-64, P-181

file concept R-23

finalize key R-30

first unit price R-34, R-180, P-25

fixed totalizer R-24, R-165, R-185, R-222, P-18, P-

39, P-133, P-149

flag clear P-11

flash R-164

flat PLU R-34, R-180, P-25

food stamp status shift R-34, R-180, P-25

food stamp subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25

food stamp system P-35

food stamp tender R-30, R-180, P-25

foreign currency P-134

free function R-165

ftp R-20, R-54, R-108, R-218, P-18, P-34, P-71, P-

72, P-184

function control P-77, P-78, P-79, P-82, P-83, P-84

function key R-25, P-130, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-203

function key totalizer R-24

general control R-205, P-21

grace time R-58

grand total R-203, P-19

graphic logo R-56, R-209, P-21

group R-170, R-192, P-19, P-133, P-149

group totalizer R-24

GT P-136, P-149

guest receipt message P-132

hand-held scanner R-16

hard key code R-12

hardware configuration R-10

home position key R-29, R-180

hourly / labor R-199

hourly item R-57, R-173, R-196, P-20

hourly item link R-196, P-63, P-180

hourly labor R-173, P-20

hourly sales R-170, R-195, P-19, P-41

house Bon R-36, R-180, P-25

i-Button key receiver R-10

I/O parameter R-216, P-18, P-55, P-176

IDC R-70, R-75, R-173, R-198, P-21

IDC link R-198, P-64, P-180

individual key R-164

INIT2 P-11

initialization P-8

inline R-15, P-55

inner multiplication R-143

insert key P-126

install system I-6

intelligent electronic journal R-83, P-21

IPL I-4

item descriptors by range P-130

item search R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25

job code R-58, R-85, R-200, P-20, P-61, P-178

journal control P-42

Ketten Bon R-36, R-180, P-25

key allocation P-24

key table R-215

keyboard R-12, P-204

keyboard bitmap image R-217

keyboard color definition R-217, P-18, P-71, P-184

keyboard color theme R-217, P-18, P-70, P-184

LCD color control R-216

left arrow key R-180

left cursor key P-126

linkage of totalizers R-24

list R-37, R-140, R-180, P-25, P-32

list link P-90

list number R-37, R-38, R-180, P-25

loan R-31, R-180, P-25

local printer R-17

location change R-38, R-180, P-25

lock out unused key P-25

magnetic card reader P-57

master R-17

media change R-37, R-147, R-180, P-25

memory allocation P-14, P-204

menu level character P-22

menu level display R-14

menu shift R-34, R-180, P-25, P-47

menu shift / 2nd@ P-76, P-81

menu title P-136, P-138, P-149

merchandise subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25

message control P-43

microphone R-10, R-15

minus R-31, R-180, P-25

mode R-12, R-26

mode control R-49, P-76, P-82

mode key R-29, R-180, P-25

money declaration P-36, P-37

monthly sales R-170, R-195, P-19

multiplication R-180, P-25, P-134

new / old check R-36, R-180, P-25

new balance R-30, R-180, P-25

new check R-35, R-180, P-25

no key R-29, R-180

no sale R-32, R-180, P-25

non-add R-32, R-180, P-25

non-add / no sale R-32, R-180, P-25

normal receipt R-31, R-180, P-25

R-236

Index

number of customer R-32, R-180, P-25

numeric key R-29, R-180

OBR R-36, R-180, P-25

old check R-36, R-180, P-25

online P-55

open R-34, R-180, P-25

open check R-37, R-146, R-171, R-180, P-25

open2 R-34, R-180, P-25

operation prompt R-229

operator number R-35, R-180, P-25

operator read / reset R-34, R-180, P-25

order character R-210, P-21, P-148

order character change R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25

order character link P-132

order control P-44

order of date P-35

order print P-88, P-90

page down key R-29, R-180

page up key R-29, R-180

paid out R-31, R-180, P-25

panel fixing screw R-10

payment R-38, R-180, P-25

physical key table P-18

pick up R-31, R-180, P-25

PLU R-33, R-165, R-180, R-187, P-18, P-25, P-129, P-

140, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198

PLU 2nd@ R-187, P-21, P-129, P-140, P-142, P-147, P-

148, P-198

PLU 2nd@ feature P-89

PLU feature P-88

PLU totalizer R-24

plus R-32, R-180, P-25

post entry R-37, R-144, R-180, P-25

power switch R-15

power switch cover R-10

premium R-32, R-180, P-25

preparation P-88

presetting date P-140

presetting time P-140

price R-33, R-180, P-25

price inquiry R-30, R-180, P-25

print buffer P-21

print control P-38

printer connection table R-216, P-18, P-59, P-176

pulldown group R-141, R-207, P-21, P-32, P-131, P-

143, P-150

QT-6060D R-16

quadruple key P-26

quantity / for R-35, R-180, P-25

random code P-40

random PLU P-36

recall R-37, R-46, R-180, P-25

receipt R-26, R-32, R-180, P-25

receipt / slip message R-208, P-21

receipt message P-132, P-148

receipt on / off R-35, R-180, P-25

received on account R-31, R-180, P-25

recovery I-9

rectangular key P-26

refund R-32, R-160, R-180, P-25

registration buffer P-21

remote display R-16, P-56

remote IPL I-5

remote printer R-16, R-17, R-39, P-55

report control P-39, P-40

report header R-206, P-21, P-135, P-149

right arrow key R-180

right cursor key P-126

round repeat R-37, R-152, R-180, P-25

rounding P-35, P-36, P-37, P-39, P-50, P-61, P-64, P-

133

satellite R-17

scanner P-56

scanning PLU R-148

scanning PLU link P-203

schedule R-58, R-201, P-20, P-62, P-178

scheduler R-210, P-21, P-48, P-175

scroll area R-12

seat number R-37, R-180, P-25

second unit price R-34, R-180, P-25

selective item subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25

self master R-17

separate check R-36, R-145, R-180, P-25

set menu R-141, R-207, P-21, P-33, P-45, P-151

shared check tracking R-44

shift key P-126

shift PLU R-34, R-151, R-165, R-175, R-180, R-188, P-

20, P-25, P-143

sign on R-68

sign on / off R-136

Singaporian tax P-35

single item P-88, P-90

slip R-28

slip back feed / release R-33, R-180, P-25

slip control P-42

slip feed / release R-33, R-180, P-25

slip message P-132

slip print R-33, R-180, P-25

slip printer R-16, P-57

sound R-211, P-22

sound control P-47

sound volume control R-136

SP-1300 R-16

space key P-126

special character R-206, P-21, P-134, P-149

split payment R-146

split pricing P-134

square R-35, R-180, P-25

stand R-10

R-237

QT-6600 Reference Manual

status icons R-12

stock R-168

stock inquiry R-30, R-180, P-25

store R-37, R-46, R-180, P-25

subdepartment R-37, R-168, R-180, R-186, P-18, P-

25, P-129, P-141, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198

subdepartment feature P-90

subdepartment number R-37, R-180, P-25

subdepartment totalizer R-24

substitution R-36, R-142, R-180, P-25

subtotal R-34, R-180, P-25

suspend R-144

system configuration R-17

system connection R-215, P-18, P-54, P-176

system down I-9

system error code R-230

system error log R-216, P-18

system key R-25, R-29

table analysis R-170, R-202, P-19, P-20, P-50, P-175

table number R-34, R-180, P-25

table range P-80, P-86, P-185

table sharing R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25

table transfer R-31, R-46, R-180, P-25

takeout R-37, R-148, R-180, P-25

tax exempt R-34, R-180, P-25

tax status shift R-33, R-180, P-25

tax system P-35

tax table R-206, P-21, P-50, P-176

taxable amount subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25

taxable status P-89

taxable symbol P-134

TCP/IP R-218, P-18, P-71, P-72, P-184

terminal file R-23

text print R-30, R-180, P-25

text recall R-30, R-180, P-25, P-132, P-148

time & attendance R-58, P-20, P-61

time zone R-200, P-20, P-60, P-177

tip R-31, R-180, P-25

touch screen key table R-215, P-18

touch screen panel R-10

transaction key R-186, R-189, P-18

tray total R-34, R-180, P-25

two zero R-180

U.S. tax P-35

up arrow R-180

UP-350 R-16, R-40

UP-360 R-16, R-40

validation R-27, R-32, R-180, P-25

VAT R-33, R-180, P-25, P-35, P-40

VAT & VAT P-52, P-53

void R-32, R-137, R-180, P-25

void reason R-170, P-19

void table R-202, P-54, P-176

work time R-199, P-20

X/Z report R-28

X/Z report control P-85

yes key R-29, R-180

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.

6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome

Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

MA0811-A

Printed in Japan

QT-6600REF*E

Casio Qt6600 Reference Manual User Ece449c9 5cfd 43d1 89db 9344cd5d0bd8

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation